US20080108310A1 - Closed Loop Mimo Systems and Methods - Google Patents

Closed Loop Mimo Systems and Methods Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080108310A1
US20080108310A1 US11/630,391 US63039105A US2008108310A1 US 20080108310 A1 US20080108310 A1 US 20080108310A1 US 63039105 A US63039105 A US 63039105A US 2008108310 A1 US2008108310 A1 US 2008108310A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
matrix
sub
channel
receiver
antenna
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US11/630,391
Other versions
US9271221B2 (en
Inventor
Wen Tong
Ming Jia
Jianglei Ma
Peiying Zhu
Hua Xu
Dong-Sheng Yu
Hang Zhang
Mo-Han Fong
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Apple Inc
Original Assignee
Nortel Networks Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nortel Networks Ltd filed Critical Nortel Networks Ltd
Priority to US11/630,391 priority Critical patent/US9271221B2/en
Publication of US20080108310A1 publication Critical patent/US20080108310A1/en
Assigned to NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED reassignment NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: TONG, WEN, FONG, MO-HAN, JIA, MING, MA, JIANGLEI, WU, Dong-sheng, XU, HUA, ZHANG, HANG, ZHU, PEIYING
Assigned to NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED reassignment NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: TONG, WEN, FONG, MO-HAN, JIA, MING, MA, JIANGLEI, XU, HUA, YU, DONG-SHENG, ZHANG, HANG, ZHU, PEIYING
Assigned to Rockstar Bidco, LP reassignment Rockstar Bidco, LP ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED
Assigned to APPLE INC. reassignment APPLE INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: Rockstar Bidco, LP
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US9271221B2 publication Critical patent/US9271221B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H04B7/0478Special codebook structures directed to feedback optimisation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0667Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of delayed versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0671Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of delayed versions of same signal using different delays between antennas
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0667Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of delayed versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0673Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of delayed versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0691Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using subgroups of transmit antennas
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0028Variable division
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/005Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of common pilots, i.e. pilots destined for multiple users or terminals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/02Channels characterised by the type of signal
    • H04L5/023Multiplexing of multicarrier modulation signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/08Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/50Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/54Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access, e.g. scheduled or random access
    • H04W74/04Scheduled or contention-free access
    • H04W74/06Scheduled or contention-free access using polling
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601Multicarrier modulation systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023Time-frequency-space
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0058Allocation criteria
    • H04L5/006Quality of the received signal, e.g. BER, SNR, water filling
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource

Definitions

  • the invention relates to MIMO (multiple input, multiple output) systems and methods.
  • MIMO OFDM multiple input multiple output OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) systems
  • New advances in MIMO OFDM systems are taught in Applicant's co-pending application ⁇ attorney docket 71493-1320> entitled “Pilot Design For OFDM Systems With Four transmit Antennas” filed Mar. 15, 2005, and in Applicant's co-pending application ⁇ attorney docket 71493-1330) entitled “Wireless Communication Methods, Systems, And Signal Structures” filed Apr. 4, 2005, both hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • the transmitter transmits on the multiple transmitter antennas and sub-carriers without the benefit of channel information fed back from the receivers.
  • broadband closed-loop MIMO which might for example be based on OFDM modulation schemes
  • narrowband closed-loop MIMO narrowband closed-loop MIMO.
  • Broadband closed-loop MIMO includes many sub-bands. Each of these sub-bands requires MTMO channel feedback for a closed-loop implementation. As a result the feedback resources required for broadband closed-loop MIMO can become quite large.
  • Narrowband closed-loop MIMO by comparison, includes one or a few sub-bands and requires a relatively smaller amount of feedback resources. Broadband and narrowband MIMO, therefore, have different applications.
  • the invention provides a MIMO system comprising: a transmitter having multiple transmit antennas; at least one receiver, each receiver having at least one receive antenna; each receiver being adapted to transmit at least one type of feedback information selected from a group consisting of: information for use in performing beam-forming; antenna selection/grouping information.
  • a transmission format to each receiver is selected from a group of transmission formats consisting of: spatial multiplexing; vector weighted spatial multiplexing; matrix weighted spatial multiplexing; K-stream spatial multiplexing employing more than K transmit antennas; single stream STTD; single stream STTD with proportional weighting and antenna selection; multi-stream STTD; multi-stream STUD with layer weighting; multi-stream STTD with a combination of layer weighting and proportional weighting; and hybrid beam-forming and spatial multiplexing.
  • a defined sub-set of available formats is made available for a given receiver, and wherein the given receiver feeds back a selection of one of the defined sub-set of available formats.
  • each receiver performs respective channel measurements and feeds back information for use in performing beam-forming based on the respective channel measurements.
  • the information for use in performing beam-forming is selected from a group consisting of: a) elements of a measured channel matrix; b) elements of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; c) parameters of a Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; d) parameters of a truncated Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix, where one or more eigen-vectors are discarded; e) differentially encoded elements of a measured channel matrix; f) differentially encoded elements of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; g) differentially encoded parameters of a Givens decomposition or truncated Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; h) Householder decomposition; i) full scalar quantization of any of the information types of a) through h); j) partial
  • beam-forming feedback is performed by each receiver as a function of receiver specific criteria.
  • the receiver specific criteria is selected from a group consisting of: Max SNR; b) Max Shannon capacity; and c) True receiver operational process.
  • antenna selection/grouping information is at least one information type selected from a group consisting of: a) selection between SM (spatial multiplexing) and STTD (space time transmit diversity) transmission format; b) selection of particular antennas for SM transmission; c) selection and grouping of particular antennas for STTD transmission; and d) eigen-mode selection information.
  • the system further comprises the receiver determining the antenna selection/grouping information by performing a step selected from a group of steps consisting of: performing SVD decomposition and discarding weak eigen-modes; selecting antennas using determinants of sub-MIMO channel matrices.
  • feed back and beam-forming and/or antenna selection/grouping is performed for sub-carriers of a multi-carrier system to a resolution selected from a group consisting of: a) for every sub-carrier individually; b) for groups of consecutive sub-carriers; c) for an entire set of sub-carriers; d) for sets of groups of sub-carriers.
  • transmission matrices and feedback are in accordance with one of FIGS. 11 to 14 .
  • the transmitter transmits pilots on each transmit antenna for use in performing channel estimation.
  • At least some of the pilots are punctured pilots.
  • At least some of the pilots comprise un-coded pilots for use by multiple receivers.
  • the pilots comprise user specific pre-coded pilots for use by particular receivers receivers.
  • the pilots comprise user specific pre-coded pilots for use by particular receivers receivers and un-coded pilots for use by multiple receivers.
  • the pilot patterns are as shown in any one of FIGS. 17-23 with generalizations as described.
  • the pilot patterns are as shown in one of FIGS. 26-31 with generalizations as described.
  • feedback information is transmitted using a feedback channel having the structure of one of FIGS. 46 to 48 with generalizations as described.
  • At least one receiver has a plurality of receive antennas.
  • the at least one receiver comprises a plurality of receivers.
  • sub-channels are defined using at least one of; AMC sub-channels, where respective adaptive modulation and coding is defined for each AMC sub-channel; PUSC sub-channels.
  • a receiver is provided that is adapted to implement receiver functionality as summarized above.
  • a transmitter is provided that is adapted to implement transmitter functionality as summarized above.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram representation of a cellular communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram representation of a base station according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram representation of a mobile terminal according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a logical breakdown of an OFDM transmitter architecture according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a logical breakdown of an OFDM receiver architecture according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a first example schematic diagram for beam-forming spatial multiplexing (SM) transmission using matrix or vector weighting according to an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 7 is a second example schematic diagram for beam-forming SM transmission with matrix weighting according to an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for use in describing antenna/sub-channel selection criteria
  • FIG. 9 is a graphical comparison of fixed D-STTD (double-space-time time division) and antenna grouping D-STTD;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of sub-channel allocation for a 4-antenna transmitter and two 2-antenna receivers according to an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 3-transmit antenna grouping arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 3-transmit antenna selection arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 4-transmit antenna arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 4-transmit antenna arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIGS. 15 and 16 show binary unitary beam-forming matrices in accordance with embodiments of the invention.
  • FIG. 17 is pilot mapping for a pilot allocation for 4-antenna BS (base station) for the optional FUSC (full utilization sub-channel) and Optional AMC (adaptive modulation and coding) zones in 802.16d in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIGS. 18 and 19 are pilot mappings for a pilot allocation for four transmit antennas in which there is no puncturing required in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 are pilot mappings for a pilot allocation for eight transmit antennas in accordance with an embodiments of the invention.
  • FIGS. 22 and 23 are pilot mappings for a pilot allocation for twelve transmit antennas in accordance-with an embodiments of the invention.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram showing an example of pre-coding of MIMO pilots in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing an example of pre-coding of MIMO pilots in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for larger antenna arrays;
  • FIG. 26 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 27 is a second pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 28 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 3-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 29 is a pilot mapping showing a pilot design for a 4-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 30 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna BS for PUSC (partial utilization sub-channel) zone in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 31 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 4-antenna ES for PUSC zone in accordance with an embodiment of the invention
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of a set of closed loop STC/MIMO arrangements with beam-former structures in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIGS. 33, 34 , 35 and 36 present a comparison of SVD (singular value decomposition) to antenna grouping
  • FIG. 37 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention in which MIMO channel and CQI (channel quality indication) are separately fed back;
  • FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with another embodiment of the invention in which MIMO channel and CQI are jointly fed back;
  • FIG. 39 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention featuring 1 bit DPCM;
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention and using a 1 bit AZ modulator;
  • FIG. 41 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention for multiple users;
  • FIG. 42 contains a table of various direct differential encoding feedback in accordance with embodiments of the invention.
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram of a system employing an SVD based Givens transform feedback in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 44 is another example of an SVD based Givens transform in accordance with an embodiment of the invention in which a further spherical code based quantization is performed;
  • FIG. 45 is a block diagram of a system employing a receiver based Givens transform in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 46 is an example of space-time coding for use on a CQICH (channel quality indication channel) in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for a single input single output application;
  • CQICH channel quality indication channel
  • FIG. 47 is an example of space-time coding for CQICH in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for supporting STUD;
  • FIG. 48 is an example of space-time coding for CQICH in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for SM (spatial multiplexing);
  • FIGS. 49 and 50 are a set of tables for concatenation of STC (space-time coding)/MIMO with a beam-former in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • AMC Adaptive Coding and Modulation
  • MSS Mobile Subscriber Station
  • FIG. 1 shows a base station controller (BSC) 10 which controls wireless communications within multiple cells 12 , which cells are served by corresponding base stations (BS) 14 .
  • BSC base station controller
  • each base station 14 facilitates communications using OFDM with mobile terminals 16 , which are within the cell 12 associated with the corresponding base station 14 .
  • the movement of the mobile terminals 16 in relation to the base stations 14 results in significant fluctuation in channel conditions.
  • the base stations 14 and mobile terminals 16 may include multiple antennas to provide spatial diversity for communications.
  • the base station 14 generally includes a control system 20 , a baseband processor 22 , transmit circuitry 24 , receive circuitry 26 , multiple antennas 28 , and a network interface 30 .
  • the receive circuitry 26 receives radio frequency signals bearing information from one or more remote transmitters provided by mobile terminals 16 (illustrated in FIG. 3 ).
  • a low noise amplifier and a filter (not shown) cooperate to amplify and remove broadband interference from the signal for processing.
  • Downconversion and digitization circuitry (not shown) will then downconvert the filtered, received signal to an intermediate or baseband frequency signal, which is then digitized into one or more digital streams.
  • the baseband processor 22 processes the digitized received signal to extract the information or data bits conveyed in the received signal. This processing typically comprises demodulation, decoding, and error correction operations. As such, the baseband processor 22 is generally implemented in one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application-specific integrated circuits
  • the baseband processor 22 receives digitized data, which may represent voice, data, or control information, from the network interface 30 under the control of control system 20 , and encodes the data for transmission.
  • the encoded data is output to the transmit circuitry 24 , where it is modulated by a carrier signal having a desired transmit frequency or frequencies.
  • a power amplifier (not shown) will amplify the modulated carrier signal to a level appropriate for transmission, and deliver the modulated carrier signal to the antennas 28 through a matching network (not shown). Modulation and processing details are described in greater detail below.
  • a mobile terminal 16 configured according to one embodiment of the present invention is illustrated. Similar to the base station 14 , the mobile terminal 16 will include a control system 32 , a baseband processor 34 , transmit circuitry 36 , receive circuitry 38 , multiple antennas 40 , and user interface circuitry 42 .
  • the receive circuitry 38 receives radio frequency signals bearing information from one or more base stations 14 .
  • a low noise amplifier and a filter (not shown) cooperate to amplify and remove broadband interference from the signal for processing.
  • Downconversion and digitization circuitry (not shown) will then downconvert the filtered, received signal to an intermediate or baseband frequency signal, which is then digitized into one or more digital streams.
  • the baseband processor 34 processes the digitized received signal to extract the information or data bits conveyed in the received signal. This processing typically comprises demodulation, decoding, and error correction operations, as will be discussed on greater detail below.
  • the baseband processor 34 is generally implemented in one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) and application specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • the baseband processor 34 receives digitized data, which may represent voice, data, or control information, from the control system 32 , which it encodes for transmission.
  • the encoded data is output to the transmit circuitry 36 , where it is used by a modulator to modulate a carrier signal that is at a desired transmit frequency or frequencies.
  • a power amplifier (not shown) will amplify the modulated carrier signal to a level appropriate for transmission, and deliver the modulated carrier signal to the antennas 40 through a matching network (not shown).
  • Various modulation and processing techniques available to those skilled in the art are applicable to the present invention.
  • the transmission band is divided into multiple, orthogonal carrier waves. Each carrier wave is modulated according to the digital data to be transmitted. Because OFDM divides the transmission band into multiple carriers, the bandwidth per carrier decreases and the modulation time per carrier increases. Since the multiple carriers are transmitted in parallel, the transmission rate for the digital data, or symbols, on any given carrier is lower than when a single carrier is used.
  • OFDM modulation typically employs the performance of an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on the information to be transmitted.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • the characterizing feature of OFDM modulation is that orthogonal carrier wave are generated for multiple bands within a transmission channel.
  • the modulated signals are digital signals having a relatively low transmission rate and capable of staying within their respective bands.
  • the individual carrier waves are not modulated directly by the digital signals. Instead, all carrier waves are modulated at once by IFFT processing.
  • OFDM is used for at least the downlink transmission from the base stations 14 to the mobile terminals 16 .
  • Each base station 14 is equipped with N transmit antennas 28
  • each mobile terminal 16 is equipped with M receive antennas 40 .
  • the respective antennas can be used for reception and transmission using appropriate duplexers or switches.
  • a logical OFDM transmission architecture is provided according to one embodiment.
  • the base station controller 10 will send data to be transmitted to various mobile terminals 16 to the base station 14 .
  • the base station 14 may use the CQIs associated with the mobile terminals to schedule the data for transmission as well as select appropriate coding and modulation for transmitting the scheduled data.
  • the CQIs may be directly from the mobile terminals 16 or determined at the base station 14 based on information provided by the mobile terminals 16 . In either case, the CQI for each mobile terminal 16 is a function of the degree to which the channel amplitude (or response) varies across the OFDM frequency band.
  • the scheduled data 44 which is a stream of bits, is scrambled in a manner reducing the peak-to-average power ratio associated with the data using data scrambling logic 46 .
  • a cyclic redundancy check (CPC) for the scrambled data is determined and appended to the scrambled data using CAC adding logic 48 .
  • channel coding is performed using channel encoder logic 50 to effectively add redundancy to the data to facilitate recovery and error correction at the mobile terminal 16 .
  • the channel coding for a particular mobile terminal 16 may be based on the CQI.
  • the channel encoder logic 50 uses known Turbo encoding techniques in one embodiment.
  • the encoded data is then processed by rate matching logic 52 to compensate for the data expansion associated with encoding.
  • Bit interleaver logic 54 systematically reorders the bits in the encoded data to minimize the loss of consecutive data bits.
  • the resultant data bits are systematically mapped into corresponding symbols depending on the chosen baseband modulation by mapping logic 56 .
  • mapping logic 56 Preferably, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) or Quadrature Phase Shift Key (QPSK) modulation is used.
  • QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
  • QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Key
  • the degree of modulation is preferably chosen based on the CQI for the particular mobile terminal.
  • the symbols may be systematically reordered to further bolster the immunity of the transmitted signal to periodic data loss caused by frequency selective fading using symbol interleaver logic 58 .
  • STC encoder logic 60 which modifies the symbols in a fashion making the transmitted signals more resistant to interference and more readily decoded at a mobile terminal 16 .
  • the STC encoder logic 60 will process the incoming symbols and provide N outputs corresponding to the number of transmit antennas 28 for the base station 14 .
  • the control system 20 and/or baseband processor 22 will provide a mapping control signal to control STC encoding.
  • the symbols for the N outputs are representative of the data to be transmitted and capable of being recovered by the mobile terminal 16 . See A. F. Naguib, N.
  • each of the symbol streams output by the STC encoder logic 60 is sent to a corresponding IFFT processor 62 , illustrated separately for ease of understanding.
  • the IFFT processors 62 will preferably operate on the respective symbols to provide an-inverse Fourier Transform.
  • the output of the IFFT processors 62 provides symbols in the time domain.
  • the time domain symbols are grouped into frames, which are associated with a prefix by like insertion logic 64 .
  • Each of the resultant signals is up-converted in the digital domain to an intermediate frequency and converted to an analog signal via the corresponding digital up-conversion (DUC) and digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion circuitry 66 .
  • the resultant (analog) signals are then simultaneously modulated at the desired RF frequency, amplified, and transmitted via the RF circuitry 68 and antennas 28 .
  • pilot signals known by the intended mobile terminal 11 are scattered among the sub-carriers.
  • the mobile terminal 16 which is discussed in detail below, will use the pilot signals for channel estimation.
  • FIG. 5 illustrate reception of the transmitted signals by a mobile terminal 16 .
  • the respective signals are demodulated and amplified by corresponding RF circuitry 70 .
  • Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter and down-conversion circuitry 72 digitizes and downconverts the analog signal for digital processing.
  • the resultant digitized signal may be used by automatic gain control circuitry (AGC) 74 to control the gain of the amplifiers in the RF circuitry 70 based on the received signal level.
  • AGC automatic gain control circuitry
  • the digitized signal is provided to synchronization logic 76 , which includes coarse synchronization logic 78 , which buffers several OFDM symbols and calculates an auto-correlation between the two successive OFDM symbols.
  • a resultant time index corresponding to the maximum of the correlation result determines a fine synchronization search window, which is used by fine synchronization logic 80 to determine a precise framing starting position based on the headers.
  • the output of the fine synchronization logic 80 facilitates frame acquisition by frame alignment logic 84 . Proper framing alignment is important so that subsequent FFT processing provides an accurate conversion from the time to the frequency domain.
  • the fine synchronization algorithm is based on the correlation between the received pilot signals carried by the headers and a local copy of the known pilot data.
  • the synchronization logic 76 includes frequency offset and clock estimation logic 82 , which is based on the headers to help estimate such effects on the transmitted signal and provide those estimations to the correction logic 88 to properly process OFDM symbols.
  • the OFDM symbols in the time domain are ready for conversion to the frequency domain using FFT processing logic 90 .
  • the results are frequency domain symbols, which are sent to processing logic 92 .
  • the processing logic 92 extracts the scattered pilot signal using scattered pilot extraction logic 94 , determines a channel estimate based on the extracted pilot signal using channel estimation logic 96 , and provides channel responses for all sub-carriers using channel reconstruction logic 98 .
  • the pilot signal is multiple pilot symbols that are scattered among the data symbols throughout the OFDM sub-carriers in a known pattern in both time and frequency.
  • the processing logic compares the received pilot symbols with the pilot symbols that are expected in certain sub-carriers at certain times to determine a channel response for the sub-carriers in which pilot symbols were transmitted.
  • the results are interpolated to estimate a channel response for most, if not all, of the remaining sub-carriers for which pilot symbols were not provided.
  • the actual and interpolated channel responses are used to estimate an overall channel response, which includes the channel responses for most, if not all, of the sub-carriers in the OFDM channel.
  • the frequency domain symbols and channel reconstruction information which are derived from the channel responses for each receive path are provided to an STC decoder 100 , which provides STC decoding on both received paths to recover the transmitted symbols.
  • the channel reconstruction information provides equalization information to the STC decoder 100 sufficient to remove the effects of the transmission channel when processing the respective frequency domain symbols
  • the recovered symbols are placed back in order using symbol de-interleaver logic 102 , which corresponds to the symbol interleaver logic 58 of the transmitter.
  • the de-interleaved symbols are then demodulated or de-mapped to a corresponding bitstream using de-mapping logic 104 .
  • the bits are then de-interleaved using bit de-interleaver logic 106 , which corresponds to the bit interleaver logic 54 of the transmitter architecture.
  • the de-interleaved bits are then processed by rate de-matching logic 108 and presented to channel decoder logic 10 to recover the initially scrambled data and the CRC checksum.
  • CRC logic 112 removes the CRC checksum, checks the scrambled data in traditional fashion, and provides it to the de-scrambling logic 114 for de-scrambling using the known base station de-scrambling code to recover the originally transmitted data 116 .
  • a CQI is determined and transmitted to the base station 14 .
  • the CQI in a preferred embodiment is a function of the carrier-to-interference ratio (CR), as well as the degree to which the channel response varies across the various sub-carriers in the OFDM frequency band.
  • the channel gain for each sub-carrier in the OFDM frequency band being used to transmit information are compared relative to one another to determine the degree to which the channel gain varies across the OFDM frequency band.
  • numerous techniques are available to measure the degree of variation, one technique is to calculate the standard deviation of the channel gain for each sub-carrier throughout the OFDM frequency band being used to transmit data.
  • FIGS. 1 through 5 are for the purpose of providing an example system within which the closed loop MIMO embodiments described below can be applied. More generally, they can be applied in any system with multiple transmit antennas and multiple receive antennas, the particular number of transmit antennas and receive antennas being an implementation specific decision. Most of the embodiments are applicable to wide-band multi-carrier systems such as OFDM. However, they may also be applied to narrow band closed loop MIMO and even to single carrier closed loop MIMO. It is clear from the description that follows which embodiments would be applicable to a single carrier versus a multi-carrier context exclusively.
  • MIMO transmission formats and signalling apparatus are generalized to allow a variety MIMO schemes to operate using the same air-interface design.
  • basic transmission formats include: (1) spatial multiplexing (SM) and (2) space-time transmit diversity (STTD), with vector or matrix weighted full MIMO or sub-MIMO transmission based on various transmit antennas configurations. These formats can be used in single or multi-carrier configurations.
  • the schemes can also be generalized to cover multiple base station transmission.
  • Some embodiments feature a receiver selecting between various available transmit formats.
  • the particular formats to include in a given system are implementation specific.
  • BLAST is also called spatial multiplexing (SM). This transmission format allows maximum parallel transmission of data streams and can achieve a theoretical capacity limit.
  • N receiver antennas there can be N receiver antennas with N ⁇ M. Where N ⁇ M for a given receiver, antenna selection can be performed to identify a subset of the M transmit antennas for use in BLAST transmission to the receiver. Mechanisms for performing antenna selection are described below.
  • the transmission matrices are presented below in Table 2 for up to four transmit antennas. It is readily apparent how vector weighted SM matrices can be extended to handle more than four transmit antennas. With vector weighted closed loop transmission, each symbol is transmitted on a single transmit antenna and a single weight is applied to each such symbol. Other users can then be supported using the remaining antenna(s).
  • Vector weighted SM allows, for example, per antenna power allocation and balancing, SINR optimization from the receiver, and joint transmit-receive closed loop optimization as a Weiner solution.
  • M transmit antenna vector weighted SM there can be N receiver antennas with N ⁇ M, Where N ⁇ M for a given receiver, antenna selection can be performed to identify a subset of the M transmit antennas for use in BLAST transmission to the receiver. Mechanisms for performing antenna selection are described below. Other users can then be supported using the remaining antenna(s)
  • M ⁇ N MIMO matrix weighted SM transmission has associated transmission matrices as shown in Table 3, where 2, 3 and 4 transmit antenna matrices are shown.
  • Table 3 shows transmission matrices as shown in Table 3, where 2, 3 and 4 transmit antenna matrices are shown.
  • matrix weighted SM transmission matrices can be extended to handle more than four transmit antennas.
  • matrix weighted spatial multiplexing each symbol is represented on multiple transmit antennas with a respective weight. However, depending upon the weight selected, a given symbol may not necessarily be represented on all transmit antennas. Different examples of this are presented below.
  • the matrix weighted M ⁇ N SM transmission can be applied to a single user reception application where N ⁇ M or to the multi-user concurrent transmission cases, such as 2 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 1, 4 ⁇ 4 ⁇ 1, 4 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 2, for example.
  • 2 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 1 for example, means two transmit antennas, two users, and each user having one receive antenna.
  • antenna selection can be performed to identify a subset of the M transmit antennas for use in BLAST transmission to the receiver. Mechanisms for performing antenna selection are described below. Other users can then be supported using the remaining antenna(s).
  • Tables 4 to 6 and FIGS. 6 and 7 below provide illustrative examples of single and multi-user configurations of vector and matrix weighted SM beam-formers.
  • Table 4 this is a set of example configurations for the two transmit antenna case, i.e., using the 2-transmit matrix-A of Table 3 describe above.
  • Two different transmissions formats are shown with format-1 shown in the first row and format-2 shown in the second row.
  • format-1 a single user is assigned to the entire stream mapping.
  • format-2 a first user is assigned to symbol s 1 in the stream mapping and a second user is assigned to a symbol 52 in the stream mapping.
  • the transmit beam-forming that is performed is the same in both cases, however, the weights/feedback information will be different for one user as opposed to two users.
  • the three right hand columns in Table 4 show various options for feeding back channel information. These will be expanded upon in much more detail below.
  • the feedback options shown consist of feeding back the channel matrix or a portion thereof for a given user, with the form of the channel matrix or portion thereof being shown in the table, or feeding back unitary matrix information, vector information that may be quantized.
  • the symbol “x” simply indicates that this option is available for each of the formats. With the example of Table 4, for format-1 the entire channel matrix can be fed back from the single receiver to the transmitter.
  • a first user would only transmit back a portion of the channel matrix, namely h 11 , h 12 .
  • the other user would similarly transmit a portion of the channel matrix back, namely h 21 , h 22 .
  • the values w 1 , w 2 , w 3 and w 4 are the weights that are applied in transmit beam-forming. These weights are determined as a function of the feedback information received. These weights are described in much more detail below. Note that in a typical implementation, only one of the various feedback options would be implemented. While the table shows three different feedback options, a larger number of feedback options are described below and any of these can be used in a given implementation.
  • FIG. 6 provides an example of beam-forming SM transmission of matrix weighted matrix-A, wherein a first configuration generally indicated by 100 corresponds to a single user format with matrix weighting and a second configuration generally indicated by 110 corresponds to a multi-user format with matrix weighting.
  • the first configuration 100 is for a single user.
  • the user input is indicated at 102 , this consisting of two symbols x 1 , x 2 at a given instant.
  • These two inputs are then multiplied beam-forming weights in a beam-former 104 that implements beam-forming matrix G 1 104 .
  • the output of the beam-former 104 is then fed to a pair of transmit antennas 106 .
  • the beam-forming matrix corresponds to that of matrix-A for Table 3 above.
  • each of the two user inputs are multiplied by a respective vector with the first input 112 being multiplied by V 1 113 , and the second input being multiplied by V 2 115 .
  • the outputs of these vector multiplications are summed on a per element basis in adders 116 , 118 .
  • the output of the first adder 116 is fed to the first transmit antenna 120 and the output of the second adder 118 is fed to the second transmit antenna 122 .
  • the two vector multiplications V 1 113 , V 2 115 collectively implement the beam-forming operation of matrix-A of Table 3. Given that it is a multi-user format, it also corresponds to the transmission format-2 of Table 4 above.
  • Table 5 below provides similar information to that described in Table 4 above, but for a three transmit antenna case. In other words, this is elaborating the details of transmit formats available for the matrix weighted SM matrix-B described above in Table 3.
  • the options available with a three transmit case are to use all three streams for a single user as indicated at format-1 in the first row, to use one of the three symbol streams for a first user and the remaining two symbol streams for a second user as shown in format-2 in the second row, and to assign a different user to each of the three streams as shown in format-3 in the third row.
  • the transmit beam-forming matrix has the same structure.
  • the feedback options are again listed in the right hand three columns of Table 5.
  • Table 6 the configurations available for a four transmit antenna configuration with matrix weighting are shown in Table 6 below.
  • a single user format is shown in the first row; two user formats are shown in the second and fourth rows, a three user format is shown in the third row, and a four user format is shown in the fifth row. It is to be understood that not all of the potential formats have been exhaustively shown in Table 6. In all cases, the transmit beam-forming matrix has the same structure, and the feedback options for the different formats are shown in the right hand three columns of Table 6.
  • FIG. 7 shows two examples of beam-forming SM transmission of Matrix weighted matrix-C.
  • a first configuration generally indicated at 130 , corresponds to format-1 of Table 6 above, namely a format in which a single user is transmitting on all four antennas.
  • the single user's data inputs are indicated at 132 ; these are processed by beam-forming matrix G 1 134 the output of which is transmitted on four antennas 136 .
  • the second configuration shown in FIG. 2 corresponds to format-2 of Table 6 described above, namely a format in which there are two users each of which occupy two of the streams.
  • the first user's input is indicated at 142
  • the second user's input is indicated at 144 .
  • the entire arrangement indicated at 146 performs a beam-forming operation on the two user inputs. This involves multiplying user 1 input by matrix G 1 147 and user 2 input 144 by matrix G 2 148 .
  • the output to these two multiplication operations are added in adders 150 , 152 , 154 , 156 and then output on antennas 158 , 160 , 162 , 164 . It should be readily apparent how similar the structure can be created for each of the other available formats described above.
  • BLAST vector and weighted transmission configurations are generally applicable for closed loop MIMO systems with 2, 3 and 4 antennas. It should be readily apparent how these can be extended to handle a larger number of antennas.
  • these transmission configurations can be applied either on a per-carrier basis, for blocks of contiguous carriers, sets of non- or partially-contiguous carriers, or for an entire transmit bandwidth.
  • a different beam-forming matrix/user assignment can be applied on a per-carrier basis; in other implementations, the available OFDM bandwidth is divided into sub-bands, and the same beam-forming matrix/user assignment is used on each sub-band; and yet a further available option, the entire OFDM bandwidth is used to transmit with the same beam-forming configuration. In yet another option, the entire available OFDM bandwidth divided into small sub-channels, with each user being assigned a respective set of such sub-channels.
  • the SNR relation is: where ⁇ pp > ⁇ as >> ⁇ fa , where ⁇ pp , ⁇ as , and ⁇ fa are the SNRs of pre-processing, antenna selection, and fixed antenna configuration (using M fixed transmit antennas from a pool of N).
  • the gain of signal pre-processing over antenna selection is mainly from the use of beam-forming. Details of how feedback can be performed for beam-forming are given below.
  • the gain of antenna selection over fixed antenna configuration is from two areas: diversity gain and average SNR gain (over STC).
  • the water-filling principle the principle of using the most energy where conditions are the best
  • Antenna selection is the most simple and effective way to achieve diversity and SNR gain.
  • the receiver analyzes conditions on the channel and selects antennas that are best for that receiver. This antenna selection information is then fed back to the transmitter for use in performing the actual transmissions.
  • a single stream selective transmit diversity technique is represented in Table 7 below. This example assumes that there are four transmit antennas available to be selected for a single receive antenna user. The four different transmit options are shown in the table to include: the user's symbol s 1 being transmitted either using the first transmit antenna Tx 1 , or the second, third or fourth transmit antenna similarly labelled.
  • a feedback signal from the receiver is employed.
  • a two bit feedback signal is shown in the first column that can be used to identify one of four different possible transmit antennas. Other formats for the feedback information can be employed. When a single antenna is used, there is no spatial multiplexing.
  • antenna selection can take place to any appropriate sub-carrier resolution.
  • the particular feedback signalling is one particular example of how to signal back an identity of one of four antennas.
  • An appropriate signalling mechanism can be employed.
  • An embodiment of the intention proposes closed loop sub-MIMO selection for SM.
  • sub-MIMO is used to describe the case where there are multiple transmit antennas and a fewer number of receive antennas, and antenna selection is used to select a subset of the transmit antennas for use by the given receiver with the remaining antennas being available for other receivers.
  • H 12 [ h 11 h 12 h 21 h 22 ]
  • H 13 [ h 11 h 13 h 21 h 23 ]
  • H 23 [ h 12 h 13 h 22 h 23 ]
  • H 14 [ h 11 h 14 h 21 h 24 ]
  • H 24 [ h 12 h 14 h 22 h 24 ]
  • H 34 [ h 13 h 14 h 23 h 24 ]
  • antenna selection is performed on the basis of determinants calculated for the different channel matrices.
  • the particular pair of antennas that is best for a given receiver is determined by selecting the sub-system H ij that satisfies
  • max ⁇
  • This is depicted in FIG. 8 where a transmitter has four transmit antennas 190 , and a receiver has two receive antennas 192 .
  • the determinant method is employed to select two of the four transmit antennas 190 for transmitting to the receiver.
  • K columns from channel matrix II can be selected, where K is the size of the subset antenna group. There are a total of C K M choices. For each possible selection, calculate det(H′H). Finally, select the antenna group with max(det(H′H)).
  • antenna selection can be used at whatever frequency resolution may be determined for a given application.
  • the best antenna group may differ for different sub-carriers. If no other users are simultaneously being transmitted to, null sub-carriers are preferably fed into non-selected antennas. This antenna selection process is typically performed at the receiver. Once the best two transmit antennas have been selected at the receiver, the selection is fed back to the transmitter.
  • Table 8 An example of how this feedback can be performed is shown in Table 8 below. The transmit contents that are possible are shown for each of the four transmit antennas. It can be seen that there are six different permutations depending upon which two transmit antennas are selected. The first column is used to show how three bits can be used to transmit a selection of two of the six antennas.
  • feed back is for every sub-carrier. If three bits are fed back on a per sub-carrier basis, then for L sub-carriers, L ⁇ 3 bits would be required, in some implementations, feed back is for a sub-channel of contiguous sub-carriers. If three bits are fed back for a contiguous block of sub-carriers, under the assumption that channel conditions are substantially constant across the block, obviously fewer feedback bits are required.
  • the sub-MIMO channel selection is based on the sub-MIMO channel condition and the antenna power allocation for the SM data can be adjusted by the feedback information pertaining to the weights.
  • Antenna group index (illustratively 3 bits), and proportional weighting vector (illustratively 2 real elements (or alternatively complex elements), each element being of 4-bits, 6-bits, or 8-bits) are preferably provided as feedback, signals. It should be appreciated, however, that weights may be derived from feedback information and need not necessarily be directly provided in feedback information.
  • H ij , H ik and H il are the sub-MIMO systems that satisfy:
  • max ⁇
  • ⁇ then by beam-forming with the j th and k th columns of H, and setting the weights to w j det * ⁇ ( H ij ) ⁇ det * ⁇ ( H il ) ⁇ 2 + ⁇ det * ⁇ ( H
  • Table 9 is an illustrative example of this.
  • a single antenna is used to transmit a stream without any weighting; another antenna is used to transmit the same stream with weighting; and the remaining two antennas are used to transmit the other second stream, both with weighting.
  • the particular antenna used to transmit either the un-weighted symbol or the weighted symbols is information that is preferably fed back to the transmitter.
  • the weighting vector or information from which the weights can be derived is also preferably fed back from the receiver to the transmitter.
  • this would require the equivalent of three bits to identify one of the six permutations, and additional feedback for the three weights w 1 , w 2 and w 3 .
  • This format is a hybrid of beam-forming and spatial multiplexing.
  • the transmission formats described thus far have all been based on the BLAST approach in which there is a single transmitted symbol for each information symbol, or on the BLAST variant described by way of example with reference to Table 9 above in which each K-stream blast is employed on more than K antennas, so at least some of the symbols are transmitted twice.
  • Additional transmission formats are based on STTD (space time transmit diversity) in which there are at least two transmitted symbols based on each information symbol, and typically sets of two information symbols are transmitted using 2 ⁇ 2 Alamouti block.
  • STTD space time transmit diversity
  • transmit diversity is “proportionally weighted” STTD.
  • This is a middle approach between conventional STTD (no weighting) and antenna switching.
  • One advantage of this scheme is to safeguard against possible feedback error, feedback delay, and possible channel change between feedback updates for the antenna selection.
  • the channel matrix condition (CMC) does not affect STTD when orthogonal codes are used. For quasi-orthogonal codes, CMC does affect signal quality.
  • Beam-forming involves applying weights to the elements of the STTD groups, and antenna selection involves selecting a sub-set of a set of available transmit antennas for transmitting the stream.
  • a hybrid proportionally weighted STTD approach can be used.
  • the two antennas with the strongest combined SNR are selected, and proportional weighting on these two selected antennas is then applied.
  • the advantages of this scheme include; diversity and SNR gain due to antenna selection, increased robustness provided by proportional weighting, and the employment of efficient Alamouti codes.
  • feedback signals preferably include antenna group index (illustratively 3 bits), proportional weighting vector or other information allowing the determination of the weighting vector (illustratively 2 real elements, each element might for example be of 4-bits, 6-bits, or 8-bits). It should be readily apparent how the single stream case can be extended to larger numbers of transmit antennas.
  • Double Stream Transmit Diversity (D-STTD) for a Single User
  • double stream transmit diversity two streams are transmitted to a single user with each stream being sent using a respective weighted Alamouti code structure (or some other STTD structure). More generally, with an M transmit antenna system, M/2 STTD sub-groups can be formed and transmitted to a different receiver, although multiple or all of the sub-groups might be sent to one receiver. This is a hybrid case of STTD and space-multiplexing (SM). Because of inter-code interference, antenna grouping becomes more important.
  • layer based water-filling is employed to provide additional gain to the system. With layer-based water-filling, more power is transmitted to the layer having the better channel.
  • a respective pair of antennas is assigned to each stream, and the respective “layer” is transmitted on that pair of antennas.
  • more power is given to the layer having the better channel conditions.
  • Table 11 An example of a set of possible layer weighting permutations is shown in Table 11 for the four transmit antenna case.
  • transmit antennas 1 and 2 are grouped together, and antenna 3 and 4 are grouped together, to form two constituent STTD codes that can be assigned to respective receivers or to a single receiver.
  • symbols s 1 and s 2 are of one layer, while symbols s 3 and s 4 are of a second layer.
  • the feedback signals in this case are used to select one of the three different permutations, and this can take the form of an antenna group index (2 bits in the example shown), and weights or information relating to weights.
  • the water-filling weights determine the relative amount of power used on the two STTD groups.
  • the options for STTD transmissions for a single user include a pair of antennas to transmit a single layer, or multiple pairs of transmit antennas each used to transmit a respective layer, in each of these cases each layer being transmitted using STTD.
  • antenna selection/grouping is performed on a per sub-carrier basis. Alternatively, it can be performed for some other sub-carrier breakdown. In the event an entire OFDM band, this would be referred to as “fixed” STTD, while in the event of antenna grouping on a per sub-carrier basis, this is referred to as antenna grouping D-STTD, FIG. 9 shows a comparison of the performance of fixed D-STTD and antenna grouping D-STTD for an OFDM system.
  • the fixed D-STTD will perform similarly to the antenna grouping D-STTD on sub-carriers where the particular fixed antennas perform the best. Elsewhere, the antenna grouping D-STTD will perform better.
  • an antenna grouping has been performed on a per sub-carrier basis.
  • the feedback required for this implementation would be two bits per sub-carrier to choose the antennas.
  • weights are also fed back if there is available bandwidth for this.
  • antenna selection can also be used to eliminate some of the antennas and only use a single antenna per STTD block. This will make a 4 ⁇ 2 double STTD system degenerate to a 2 ⁇ 2 BLAST system. In fact, this can be viewed as applying antenna selection to each STTD sub-code—after the rule of antenna grouping has been applied.
  • proportional weighting is applied to each constituent STTD code after antenna grouping, rather than or in addition to for the STTD codes as a whole as was the case in Table 11 above.
  • An example of weighted double STTD with antenna grouping and proportional weighting is given in Table 13 below.
  • weighting is sued to get the best allocation of the Alamouti pairs among the antennas, and weighting is used to weight the antennas of a given pair differently. In the table below, both of these weights are included within the single weight w i applied to each symbol.
  • antennas 1 and 3 have been grouped to form a first STTD group, and antennas 2 and 4 have been grouped to form a second STTD group.
  • TABLE 13 Weighted double STTD with antenna grouping and proportional weighting of each element Tx 1 Tx 2 Tx 3 Tx 4 Time t w 1 s 1 w 2 s 3 w 3 s 2 w 4 s 4 Time (t + T) ⁇ w 1 s 2 * ⁇ w 2 s 4 * w 3 s 1 * w 4 s 3 *
  • FIG. 10 shown is a very specific example of how any of the above described transmission formats can be allocated to a pair of users occupying an OFDM band.
  • Each receiver has a respective pair of receive antennas.
  • antenna selection is used to select the first and fourth antennas 170 , 176 for transmitting to a second receiver 180 and to select the second and third antennas 172 , 174 for transmission to the first receiver 178 .
  • the OFDM sub-carriers that are allocated to the two receivers are indicated at 182 for the first receiver and 184 for the second receiver.
  • the sub-carriers are allocated in a non-overlapping fashion such that a different set of sub-carriers are transmitted to each of the two receivers 178 , 180 .
  • the sub-carriers are allocated to antennas in groups of six.
  • sub-carrier allocation to particular antennas, and antenna assignment to particular users can be performed on a per sub-carrier basis, or to any other desired resolution.
  • weighting information might be fed back for each sub-carrier, or for groups of six sub-carriers.
  • antenna/sub-channel selection is based on multi-user diversity; different users may select different antenna groups. Quasi-water-filling over is preferably employed in selecting antennas/sub-channels: transmitting power on good channels and antennas, while avoiding poor channels. Power balancing can be achieved through multi-user diversity. Since different receivers experience different channel environments, their antenna group selection will not necessarily the same. When different receivers select different antenna groups, the average power transmitted by each transmit antenna can be somewhat balanced.
  • the above STTD and SM options have all featured weighting, either in the form of water-filling across different STTD groups/SM antennas and/or proportional weighting within STTD groups.
  • Antenna selection/antenna grouping can be combined with these weighting options.
  • antenna selection/antenna grouping alone is employed.
  • each 4 ⁇ 3 matrix has three rows and each row is transmitted on a respective transmit antenna.
  • the first two symbols s 1 , s 2 are transmitted using STC coding on the first two antennas and during two transmit intervals, and the next two symbols s 3 , s 4 are transmitted using space time coding on the first and third antennas during the next two transmit intervals.
  • the matrices A 2 and A 3 show other permutations for selecting two of the antennas for each STC block.
  • the matrices A 1 , A 2 and A 3 are single stream transmission matrices. During four transmission intervals, four symbols s 1 , s 2 , s 3 , s 4 are transmitted.
  • FIG. 11 Another antenna grouping example is shown in FIG. 11 for matrices B 1 , B 2 , B 3 .
  • This is a two stream example. It can be seen that one of the streams consists of s 1 , s 2 , s 3 , s 4 transmitted over the four transmission intervals, and the other stream consists of symbols s 5 , s 6 , s 7 , s 8 transmitted over the four symbol transmission intervals. In this case, space time coding is applied for both streams, but diversity is applied for one of the streams but not for the other.
  • the three matrices B 1 , B 2 , B 3 show different ways of assigning the antennas to the various streams.
  • FIG. 12 shows examples of antenna groupings and antenna selections for closed loop STC/MIMO 3-transmit antenna arrangements. Also shown in FIG. 12 is a set of examples of antennas selection feedback for a three antenna system. For a single stream application, the receiver simply selects one of three antennas, and feeds back an identification of the selected antenna. Thus, C 1 represents the selection of the first antenna, C 2 represents the selection of the second antenna, and C 3 represents the selection of the third antenna.
  • the transmission matrix also shows a term “c” which represents the amount of power boosting that can be implemented. In this case, such a single antenna is used for the particular user, the entire power for that user can be applied to that single antenna and no power boosting need be employed.
  • An example of CQICH bits that might be fed back to identify one of the three permutations is also shown.
  • a power boosting factor of 1/ ⁇ square root over (2) ⁇ such that the total amount of power is divided across the two antennas for the given user.
  • FIG. 13 shows a set of example antenna groupings for 4-transmit closed loop STC/MIMO. Shown are examples for one stream, two streams and four streams. The possible matrices for one stream are indicated at A 1 , A 2 , A 3 . In each of these examples, a stream consisting of s 1 , s 2 , s 3 , s 4 is transmitted using all four antennas, with space time coding being applied between s 1 and s 2 , on two antennas and between s 3 , and s 4 over two antennas. The three different antenna groupings represent different selections of antennas for the two STC groups.
  • the matrices B 1 , B 2 , B 3 , B 4 , B 5 , B 6 show how two streams consisting of s 1 , s 2 , s 3 , s 4 and s 5 , s 6 , s 7 , s 8 can be spread across four transmit antennas in six different ways. Space time coding is again employed between sets of two symbols within each stream.
  • a power boosting factor of 1/ ⁇ square root over (2) ⁇ is applied for this case.
  • a power boosting factor of 1/ ⁇ square root over (3) ⁇ is applied.
  • Also shown in the table is an example set of bits that can used to feedback on the channel quality indicator channel selection of an appropriate one of the potential transmission matrices depending upon whether there are 1, 2 or 3 streams.
  • FIGS. 15 and 16 Two specific examples of using beam-forming to perform antenna selection are provided in FIGS. 15 and 16 for three and four antenna systems respectively.
  • the antenna selection examples of FIG. 14 This allows the unification of antenna selection with beam-forming, where W consists of binary weights in this particular case.
  • pilot transmission schemes will now be described for MIMO applications of OFDM.
  • a common pilot structure is used for any receivers that might need to rely on it.
  • no receiver specific pre-coding is performed.
  • pre-coding of pilots for specific receivers is performed.
  • the horizontal axis represents OFDM sub-carriers separated in frequency
  • the vertical axis is the time dimension, with each row representing on OFDM symbol transmission interval.
  • the receiver recovers the transmitted pilots, compares them to known content of the pilots, and determines channel estimates on the basis of this comparison. Channel estimates can be interpolated for the non-pilot sub-carrier locations.
  • pilots are allocated for four antennas as indicated at 400 , 402 , 406 , 408 .
  • the pilots are allocated in blocks of 2 ⁇ 2 sub-carrier locations, with two consecutive sub-carriers over two consecutive OFDM symbols.
  • the location of the pilot for each antenna is the same with each group of four sub-carrier locations.
  • the pilots 406 , 408 for antennas 1 and 3 are “punctured pilots”, meaning that these pilots are transmitted in place of data sub-carriers such that the receiver must rely on error correction to demodulate and recover correctly the transmitted information in the absence of the punctured data locations.
  • pilots are inserted in every pair of two consecutive OFDM symbols, but in some implementations, not every OFDM symbol contains pilots.
  • the location of the 2 ⁇ 2 blocks of pilots is staggered between adjacent pairs of OFDM symbols. In the illustrated example, the staggering is not uniform, but it could be uniform in other implementations.
  • FIG. 18 another example of a 4-antenna pilot transmission scheme is shown.
  • four pilots are inserted on a single sub-carrier for the four antennas as shown in 410 , 412 , 414 , 416 over four OFDM symbol transmission intervals.
  • Multiple such groups of four pilots are inserted in sub-carrier locations that are separated by eight data sub-carriers in the example shown.
  • the particular sub-carriers used are offset in consecutive sets of four OFDM symbols. It can be seen that half as many pilots are inserted with the example of FIG. 18 as are inserted in the example of FIG. 17 .
  • the result is that for a given sub-carrier and a given antenna, an accurate channel estimate can be obtained at the receiver half as often.
  • the interpolated channel estimates may therefore be less accurate. This has the potential of effecting the accuracy of data recovery at the receiver.
  • FIGS. 17 and 18 While a particular staggering arrangement has been shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 , it is to be understood that other arrangements are possible.
  • pilots are inserted only for two of the antennas.
  • the group of four OFDM symbols indicated at 420 pilots are inserted for antennas 0 and 1
  • pilots are inserted for antennas 1 and 3 .
  • the set of antennas alternates.
  • pilot pairs are inserted in selected OFDM sub-carrier locations over two OFDM symbols. For example, one such pair of pilot symbols is indicated at 424 , 426 , this including one pilot for antenna 0 and one pilot for antenna 2 .
  • the sub-carriers used for the pilots are offset between the first two OFDM symbols and the second OFDM symbols of the set of four OFDM symbols 420 .
  • a similar arrangement is shown for the pilots of antennas 1 and 3 during the second set of four OFDM symbols 422 . While a particular offsetting arrangement has been shown, other offsetting arrangements can be implemented.
  • FIG. 20 shown is an example of a pilot transmission scheme for an 8-antenna system.
  • Groups of eight pilots are inserted in a staggered fashion within the time frequency plane.
  • Each group is two sub-carriers by four OFDM symbols, and includes one pilot for each of the eight antennas.
  • One such group of eight is indicated at 430 .
  • pilot transmission scheme for an 8-antenna system.
  • alternating sets of four OFDM symbols are used to transmit pilots for respective sets of four antennas.
  • the first set of four OFDM symbols 440 is used for the first four antennas and the next set of four OFDM symbols 442 is used for the next set of four antennas.
  • the pilots are inserted in blocks of two sub-carriers by two OFDM symbols each containing one pilot for each of the four antennas, and the location of the block is offset between consecutive pairs of OFDM symbols.
  • FIG. 22 shown is a pilot transmission scheme for a 12-antenna system.
  • This example is basically an extension of the example of FIG. 20 but with each group of pilots being inserted having a dimension of two OFDM sub-carriers by six OFDM symbols, and each block of OFDM pilots containing one pilot for each of 12 different antennas.
  • One example block is indicated at 450 .
  • the overall pilot pattern is 12 OFDM symbols in duration.
  • the first four OFDM symbols 452 are used for first four antennas; the next four OFDM symbols 454 are used for the next four antennas, and the last four OFDM symbols 456 are used for the last four antennas.
  • Each set of four OFDM symbols is shown arranged similarly to the sets of four OFDM symbols described previously with reference to FIG. 28 for the eight antenna design.
  • the pilots are not pre-coded, and can therefore be used by any receiver to obtain channel estimations for the particular antenna.
  • the pilots for at least one antenna are pre-coded for a particular user.
  • pre-coding of pilots for a particular user may enable pilots to be inserted at a lower frequency or for the particular user and thereby save transmission bandwidth. Further examples are given below that involve pre-coding of pilots for closed-loop MIMO sub-channel transmissions.
  • pilot channel information is transmitted without any weights being applied.
  • any receiver can look at the transmitted pilot information and recover a respective channel for the particular receiver.
  • a pre-coding of the pilot is performed.
  • the feedback beam-former W or information from which it can be derived, may be computed from the channel H for a particular user, Many examples of how this feedback can be performed are detailed below.
  • the pilots need to be user-specific for such a case because beam-forming weights are receiver-specific. This is in contrast to the case where the pilots are not pre-coded and the channel can be recovered by each user.
  • FIGS. 24 and 25 compare and contrast the use of non-pre-coded pilots as opposed to pre-coded pilots.
  • FIG. 24 it is assumed that a set of non-pre-coded pilots were transmitted.
  • a distribution of data sub-carrier locations 451 and pilot sub-carrier locations 453 are shown for the purpose of example only, In this case, the channel H can be used for:
  • the non-pre-coded channel H can be re-encoded to coherently demodulate current data for each user.
  • pilots are dedicated to a particular user, and as such can be pre-coded while other pilots are for multiple use, and as such are not pre-coded.
  • the use of pre-coding for pilots can be constant, or can vary over different time.
  • a distribution of data sub-carrier locations 451 and pilot sub-carrier locations 453 are shown for the purpose of example only.
  • the pilot sub-carriers 461 are pre-coded pilots for a first receiver 465
  • pre-coded pilots are inserted for a different receiver 467 .
  • pilots may also be pilots that are transmitted for use by both users (not shown).
  • a smaller number of pilots can be used.
  • the number of pilots can be reduced in either the time or frequency dimension.
  • the density in time is kept the same and the density is reduced in the frequency domain.
  • a receiver is nomadic, i.e., it is not highly mobile, but does move periodically, it is advantageous to keep the frequency density the same, and to reduce the density in the time domain.
  • a block antenna pilot mapping is employed.
  • receiver-specific pilots The location of the receiver-specific pilots is an implementation specific decision. For the purpose of completeness, several examples are presented below.
  • FIG. 26 shows an example of pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna basestation (BS) in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • sub-channels are defined that are nine sub-carriers wide for a given receiver, each sub-channel being assigned to a respective receiver.
  • two sub-channels are indicated at 500 , 502 .
  • These sub-channels can be continuously allocated for a given mobile station, or they can be allocated in a time division manner.
  • Pilot carriers are inserted as indicated at 504 , 506 for antenna 0 and antenna 1 respectively and for the first mobile station. These are inserted in the sub-channel 500 for the first mobile station.
  • pilot carriers 508 , 510 are inserted in the sub-channel for the second receiver for antenna 0 and antenna 1 respectively. Because the pilot sub-carriers are dedicated to a particular receiver, preferably they are pre-coded as discussed above. Pre-coded pilot sub-carriers axe coded for the particular receiver using feedback information received from each receiver.
  • FIG. 26 shows sub-channels that consist of a set of sub-carriers being allocated to respective mobile stations. This approach can be extended to multiple sub-channels, more than simply the two shown. Furthermore, the particular location of the sub-carriers used for pilots can vary on an implementation specific basis. Preferably the pilots are somewhat scattered within each sub-channel for a given receiver so that better channel information can be interpolated for the remaining data sub-carrier locations.
  • FIG. 27 shown is another example in which sub-channels are divided up in a time-wise manner.
  • the sub-channel for a first mobile station is transmitted on the first two OFDM symbols as indicated at 520
  • the sub-channel for a second mobile station is transmitted on the second set of two OFDM symbols as indicated at 522 , and then this pattern repeats.
  • the sub-channel for a given mobile station may contain fewer or greater number of OFDM symbols than the two shown in FIG. 27 .
  • receiver specific pilot carriers are inserted during each of the two sub-channels 520 , 522 .
  • the pilots for the first sub-channel are indicated at 524 , 526 and the pilot carriers for the second receiver are indicated at 528 , 530 .
  • the pilots for antenna 0 are inserted in one OFDM symbol
  • the pilots for antenna 1 are inserted in the next OFDM symbol within each sub-channel.
  • a particular spacing for the pilot carriers is shown, but of course different spacings and frequencies can alternatively be employed.
  • the pilots are dedicated to a particular users they can be pre-coded for each user.
  • FIG. 26 can be extended to differing numbers of antennas.
  • An example is shown in FIG. 28 where there are three antennas and as such each sub-channel has pilot carriers for each of the three antennas.
  • the pilots for one of the antennas in the illustrated example antenna 1 , are punctured pilot carriers. This means that data locations would normally have been transmitted there, and as such the receiver must rely on error correction to correctly recover an entire transmitted data stream.
  • pilot locations could be allocated for all three antennas that do no rely on puncturing.
  • FIG. 29 for a four transmit antenna example in which the pilot carriers for two of the antennas, namely antennas 1 and 3 are punctured pilot carriers. In this example and the other examples, zero, one, or multiple pilots may rely on puncturing.
  • a pre-coded pilot design for the PUSC (partial use sub-carrier applications) is provided.
  • the symbol is first divided into basic clusters of consecutive sub-carriers. Pilots and data carriers are allocated within each cluster of sub-carriers.
  • a permutation is used when allocating the data carriers to a sub-channel, a permutation consisting of a remapping of the a cluster sub-carriers into other allocations (that can be almost random).
  • the data carriers in each cluster may be assigned to different MSSs, and therefore, pilots may be used by multiple MSSs.
  • each sub-channel includes 48 data carriers from two clusters.
  • FIG. 30 shows a pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna BS for a PUSC zone in accordance with an embodiment of the invention, where the pilot design shows the form of the cluster prior to remapping/permutation.
  • the pattern of FIG. 30 would actually be scrambled across an OFDM bandwidth.
  • the first four OFDM symbols are used for a sub-channel for a first mobile station, and the next four OFDM symbols 542 form a sub-channel for another mobile station.
  • pilots are inserted for two antennas, and these can be inserted in a receiver specific manner. Pilot carriers for the first receiver on antenna 0 are indicated at 544 , and pilot carriers for the first receiver on the next antenna are indicated at 546 . These are inserted in pairs on consecutive sub-carrier locations and in every other OFDM symbol at illustrated. The pattern continues with pilots carriers 545 , 547 inserted during the sub-channel 542 for the second receiver, and the pilots are pre-coded for the respective receivers.
  • pilot carriers are inserted for four antennas.
  • the pilot carrier insertions for antenna 0 and 1 are identical to those of FIG. 30 .
  • pilots are inserted in the first OFDM symbol of each sub-channel for antennas 2 and 3 as indicated at 550 , 552 .
  • the pilots for antennas 2 and 3 are inserted in punctured pilot locations.
  • the pilots are inserted half as frequently for the antennas 2 and 3 , namely for only one OFDM symbol of each set of four.
  • FIG. 32 shows a summary of available closed loop STC/MIMO arrangements with beam-former structures in accordance with embodiments of the invention.
  • the first option indicated at 600 is to perform MIMO/STC set up based on closed loop feedback. This may involve selection between SM and STTD, and/or antenna selection and/or antenna grouping, as defined for a given application. Given a set of options that are to be made available to a given receiver, the feedback information allows the receiver to select between the options and inform the transmitter of the selection.
  • the next option indicated at 602 is to perform beams forming based on feedback information.
  • the feedback information may come in a variety of forms described in detail below.
  • the information that is fed back allows a transmitter to generate weights for the particular receiver.
  • the feedback information can be the weights per se, or other information.
  • the next option indicated at 604 involves performing MIMO/STC setup based on feedback and feeding the output of this into a beam-former that might be static in nature.
  • the output of a MIMO/STC matrix is input into a beam-former that undergoes beam-forming as a function of feedback.
  • next option indicated at 608 involves performing MIMO/STC set up based on feedback, and feeding the output of this into a beam-former that also performing beam-forming a function of feedback.
  • the options are to apply feedback for MIMO/STC set up and/or applying feedback to the beam-former
  • the beam-former feedback information may be for a unitary beam-former structure, or some other beam-former. Detailed examples have been given previously as to how MIMO/STC set up information can be fed back, Many options for beam-former feedback are given in the details below.
  • SVD single value decomposition
  • CSI channel state information
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • the diagonal matrix ⁇ is also known at the receiver and S can then be recovered.
  • the matrix V T used in the transmitter consists of a set of unitary vectors as columns, each associated with a respective eigenvalue.
  • a 4 ⁇ 4 matrix is [v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,v 4 ] where v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,v 4 are unitary vectors in columns of the matrix.
  • Eigen-mode selection involves setting one or more of the vectors in V to zero, typically the vectors associated with the weak eigenvalue(s). In some embodiments, eigen-mode selection information is fed back to the receiver.
  • Antenna selection/grouping is based on the selection of sub-set of antennae from a larger set of available antennas by the terminal based on a simple criterion.
  • the terminal generally needs to feedback very little information to the base station, Mechanisms for transmitting this feedback information from the receiver to the transmitter have been presented above.
  • Antenna grouping criterion can be based on determinant as described previously, Antenna grouping can also be based on an eigenvalue approach. This approach may avoid selection being dominated by weak layers. Typically degradation due to antenna selection is smaller when the group size is larger.
  • the eigenvalues of the channel matrix are often unevenly distributed. Removing the layers associated with small eigenvalues will have little effects on channel capacity. With a reduced number of layers, more sophisticated MEMO decoders can be used to improve link performance. The power saved from layers that are not used for this a particular receiver can be used by other users on other sub-bands.
  • the V matrix of an SVD decomposed channel matrix consists of a set of horizontal vectors each of which are multiplied by a respective eigenvalue in the product UDV.
  • V T [v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,v 4 ]
  • V T [v 1 ,v 2 ,v 3 ,v 4 ]
  • Transmission using such a vector will be referred to as an “eigen-mode”.
  • Different AMC can be applied in the transmitter for each such eigen-mode.
  • the power allocated to the streams is not equal, and in some cases one or more of the layers is simply not used at all, and the power that would have been used for that stream is available for the other layers.
  • Feedback in such systems can consist of an index of the eigen-modes to employ, with the remaining eigen-modes shutdown, and/or with channel quality readings for some or all of the selected eigen-modes.
  • the channel quality defines an associated AMC for use on the eigen-mode at the transmitter.
  • FIG. 33 For the SVD approach showing the discarding of weak eigen-modes, and FIG. 34 showing de-selected antennas turned off/not used for the particular user.
  • FIGS. 35 and 36 show that antenna grouping can achieve very close to SVD performance with significantly lower complexity.
  • SVD generally provides optimal performance when adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) can be performed on each individual layer.
  • AMC adaptive modulation and coding
  • the performance difference is generally smaller due to imbalanced layer SNR distribution.
  • AMC is implemented on per layer basis.
  • the 4-th layer when SVD is used the 4-th layer can generally be eliminated meaning only 3 columns of the V-matrix generally need to be fed back to the transmitter. In systems with larger numbers of antennas, it may be possible to eliminate more layers.
  • any of these can be employed on a per sub-carrier, per block of sub-carriers, per group of blocks of sub-carriers or for an entire OFDM band. They can be applied for a single or multiple user system.
  • the receiver computes criterion for use in selecting between STTD and SM transmission modes as follows, where if the STTD criteria is greater than the SM criteria, then STTD transmission is employed and alternatively, SM is employed. Other criteria can be used.
  • Q ⁇ max ⁇ min ⁇ ⁇
  • S a arg max( det ( H a ′H a )) where H a is the channel matrix of the new sub-MIMO size, and ⁇ and ⁇ are predefined thresholds, and where ⁇ max and ⁇ min are the largest and smallest eigenvalues respectively.
  • Step 1 Decide antenna group size for STTD and SM mode
  • Step 2 Select-transmit antenna sub-sets based on selected size
  • Step 3 Decide transmit rode: STTD vs. SM;
  • Step 4 If SM is selected and the antenna group size is larger than SM layers, then use Matrix B, otherwise, use Matrix C.
  • a multi-user pre-coding algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described.
  • the vector w k ⁇ C N ⁇ 1 is white Gaussian noise with zero-mean and unit-variance.
  • the transmitted vector a carries information for M users, defined as follows.
  • d ⁇ (j) includes information for the user ⁇ (j).
  • dirty-paper pre-coding is used on top of the system such that if i>j, the interference of the user ⁇ (i) over user ⁇ (j) is zero.
  • the user ⁇ (j) multiplies the received vector to a normal vector u′ ⁇ (j) where (.)′ denotes transpose conjugate operation.
  • (.)′ denotes transpose conjugate operation.
  • Each stage of the algorithm includes two optimizing operations. First, for each user, finding a direction in which that user has maximum gain. Second, selecting the best user in terms of the larger gain. This optimization is performed in the null space of the former selected coordinates. In the following, the proposed algorithm is presented.
  • Each user sends ⁇ 2 r(j) and V r(j) to the base station, if ⁇ r(j) 2 ⁇ th(j).
  • th(j) is a threshold which is predetermined by the base station.
  • Base station selects the user with the largest ⁇ 2 r(j) .
  • ⁇ (j) be the index of the selected user.
  • the corresponding gain and coordinate of that user are ⁇ 2 ⁇ (j) and v ⁇ (j) , respectively.
  • Base station send v ⁇ (j) to all users. All include v ⁇ (j) in G eq as the j th column. 8) j ⁇ j+1. If j ⁇ M go to step two, otherwise stop.
  • Feedback MIMO Channel and CQI Separately
  • FIG. 37 shown is a block diagram of a system in which MIMO channel information for use in performing beam-forming, and MIMO/STC setup information are separately fed back in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • the MIMO/STC setup information is fed back on a CQICH (channel quality indication) feedback channel, various permutations of which are available in existing standards definitions, but it is to be understood that in this and the other examples that follow, any appropriate physical/logical channel can be employed to feed back the MIMO/STC setup information as required.
  • CQICH channel quality indication
  • a transmit beam-former 202 that uses matrix V T this being the transpose of the matrix v in the singular value decomposition of the channel H.
  • the output of the beam-former is transmitted on M transmit antennas 204 .
  • This is received at the receiver by N receive antennas 206 , and the MIMO channel H is measured as indicated at 208 .
  • block 212 performs a singular value decomposition of the channel matrix H into the matrix product UDV where U and V are unitary matrices and D is a diagonal matrix containing the eigenvalues.
  • AMC/eigen assignment according to according to eigenvalue is performed for any appropriate frequency resolution, for example for a given sub-channel.
  • a sub-channel may for example be a contiguous block of sub-carriers that have substantially the same eigenvectors/eigenvalues, As discussed previously, weak eigen-modes can be discarded. In some embodiments, all that needs to be fed back is an index of the eigen-modes that are to be used. Then, the receiver, after it reconstructs the H or V matrix from the fed back channel information, can re-construct the eigen-modes, and use each eigen-mode for a respective stream. This information is then sent back to the transmitter on the CQI feedback channel 222 or using some other mechanism.
  • the difference between the new channel matrix H and the previous channel matrix E is measured and a differential is determined between the two most recent channel matrices.
  • This amount is encoded at 210 and transmitted back to the receiver on the MIMO feedback channel 214 .
  • the differential of two consecutive channel matrices will have a significantly smaller dynamic range than would the actual channel matrix H or V matrix. This enables the MIMO feedback channel 214 to use fewer bits to transmit back effectively the same amount of channel information.
  • the channel matrix H is reconstructed at 216 using the fed back channel differential and the previous channel matrix H.
  • Singular value decomposition is performed at 218 to recover the V matrix component of the channel matrix H, and the transpose of this matrix is then used in the beam-former 202 .
  • the CQI feedback channel 222 feeds into the per stream AMC function 200 that performs adaptive modulation of coding on each stream using the channel quality information as sent back from the receiver.
  • a differential of the channel matrix H is fed back. Equivalently, the unitary matrix V or a differential of the unitary matrix V could be fed back. Various detailed methods of feeding back the channel matrix or the unitary matrix V are provided below.
  • FIG. 37 and the other embodiments described generalize to an arbitrary number of transmit antennas and receive antennas. While a particular arrangement of components are shown for each of the various embodiments, it is to be understood that the functionality of these components can be combined or separated differently than shown on an implementation specific basis. Furthermore, FIG. 37 can be thought of representing either a system or a method.
  • FIG. 3B shown is a system example in which the MIMO channel and the CQI are jointly fed back in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • Shown in the transmit side is a per stream AMC and beam-former V T 240 that has outputs connected to M transmit antennas 242 .
  • On the receive side there are N receive antennas 244 and there is a function that measures the MIMO channel H at 246 .
  • the MIMO channel H is differentially encoded at 248 .
  • the receiver has knowledge of a set of possible differentially encoded H (or v in which case SVD decomposition is performed at 250 ) matrices, for example 64 different differential matrices.
  • the receiver determines the candidate differential H matrix that is closest to the actual differential.
  • Each possible H matrix has an associated predetermined adaptive modulation and coding and an associated index. Therefore, by simply feeding back the index from the receiver to the transmitter, the transmitter can determine the proper beam-former V T , and the appropriate per stream adaptive modulation and coding to perform. The transmitter then reconstructs N at 254 and performs singular value decomposition at 256 to recover the unitary matrix V which is then used in the beam-former step. Note that while the illustrated embodiment shows H being differentially encoded and fed back, equivalently the unitary matrix could be differentially encoded and fed back.
  • FIG. 39 shows a block diagram of an example of a differential scalar quantizer that can be used to feedback quantized differentials.
  • the input 260 is the new value that needs to be quantized. This can be element in a channel matrix or a unitary matrix for example. Every k frames, this amount is passed through the scalar quantizer 262 and on to the feedback channel 264 . This means that every k frames, the receiver feeds back the actual value as opposed to the differential value. This avoids the potential problem of drift that can occur over time due to ongoing differential quantization. For the remaining frames, quantization is performed.
  • this consists of +1, ⁇ 1 quantization 266 .
  • the quantization is performed on the basis of a difference between the current input 260 and the “previous input” 268 by difference function 270 .
  • the previous input is maintained by updating the value with the actual value every k frames in accumulator 272 and then applying any plus or minus quantizations as determined at the output of the + 1 , ⁇ 1 quantizer 266 and storing the result in a delay element 274 .
  • each channel element is complex and therefore has an I and Q component. Therefore, to feedback quantized information for a 2 ⁇ 2 channel matrix requires eight bits, two bits per channel element, one bit per I and Q components,
  • a ⁇ modulator 1-bit quantizer is employed to determine the information to be fed back.
  • An example of a 1 st -order ⁇ modulation encoder is shown in FIG. 40 .
  • a new channel measurement is input at 280 . This might for example be a C/I measurement for a particular channel element.
  • An offset is applied at 282 so as to move the dynamic range of the channel measurement within the range of the ⁇ signal modulator that follows.
  • a limiter 286 is also shown that limits the dynamic range of the input to prevent ⁇ overflow.
  • a given implementation may not include either of the offset and limiter features or may include just one of them or both of them as illustrated.
  • the input level is often less than the quantizer step size ⁇ and hence is denoted by ⁇ where ⁇ 1 dependent on ⁇ type.
  • a dither signal may also be applied 289 to the 1 st -order ⁇ modulator input to eliminate the limit cycle inherent in the 1 st -order modulators and in this instance is a sequence ( ⁇ /8, ⁇ /8).
  • the remainder of the encoder is a classical ⁇ modulators with the exception there are no delays in the signal paths,
  • the output per I or Q component of a channel matrix is a plus or minus one. Again, different resolutions can be implemented if a given application needs the higher resolution.
  • ⁇ modulation can more generally be applied to any parameter for which feedback is to be implemented.
  • FIG. 41 shows an example of a system that employs differential encoding of the channel matrix H from multiple receivers. This is simply an example to show that for the most part any of the examples given herein can be adapted for use with multiple users.
  • there are two users each having a respective pair of antennas 300 , 302 .
  • Each user performs a channel measurement 304 , 306 respectively and differential encoding of the channel matrix 308 , 310 .
  • the channel information is then fed back to the transmitter where a per stream AMC and beam-forming is performed as indicated at 314 .
  • the feedback channel from the users typically has limited capacity. This may be a dedicated channel for each user, or may be a channel that is shared across users in a scheduled fashion.
  • the differential encoder output may be grouped together to map to the existing CQI feedback channel or MIMO feedback channel.
  • the V matrix determined through singular value decomposition is fed back from the receiver to the transmitter using Givens feedback.
  • Unitary matrices have the property that they can be decomposed into a product of Givens matrices.
  • an n ⁇ n V matrix can be decomposed into Givens matrices containing n 2 ⁇ n complex parameters. The parameters can be fed back directly, or differentially and/or quantized to potentially reduce the amount of feedback required. Then, at the transmitter, the Givens matrices can be reconstructed, and then the V matrix reconstructed as the product of the reconstructed Givens matrices.
  • FIG. 43 An example of a system employing Givens feedback is shown FIG. 43 .
  • Shown is a transmit beam-former 320 with transmit antennas 322 .
  • receive antennas 324 receive signals, and the channel measurement is performed at 326 .
  • This produces the channel matrix which is then SVD decomposed at 328 .
  • the V matrix is decomposed by the Givens transform 330 to produce a series of matrices G 1 , G 2 , . . . , the number of matrices being required being a function of the size of the channel matrix.
  • Each such Givens matrix can then be uniquely represented by two parameters ⁇ and C. These parameters are selected at 332 and differentially quantized at 334 .
  • the quantized parameters ⁇ and C are fed back over the MIMO feedback channel 336 , this requiring two parameters to be sent back for each Givens matrix.
  • the fed back parameters ⁇ and C are reconstructed at 338 , and then the beam-forming matrix V is reconstructed by determining the product of the Givens matrices generated using the reconstructed parameters, at 340 .
  • the transpose of the matrix V is used by the beam-former 320 .
  • the parameters may be directly fed back or differentially fed back.
  • AMC/eigen assignment is performed on the basis of eigenvalues of the channel matrix of the SVD composition performed at 328 as described previously. This step is indicated at 332 .
  • the AMC/eigen assignment information is fed back over the CQI channel at 342 . This information is fed back to the transmitter where per stream AMC is performed is indicated at 344 .
  • the base station is able to verify the integrity of the received matrix V by exploiting the orthogonality of the matrix.
  • the V matrix can be represented by n 2 ⁇ n independent complex parameters.
  • 2(n 2 ⁇ n) bits are used for the differential quantization of the unitary V matrix, although other methods of feeding back the parameters can be used.
  • an n stream CQI channel may also be used, preferably 4 bits each. Combining the Given's feedback and the CQI yields the total amount for the unitary matrix feedback of 2n 2 +2n bits. However, for the direct differential encoding approach the total feedback used is 2n 2 including the CQI information, since it is embedded in H.
  • FIG. 42 shows an example set of feedback requirements for N by N MIMO systems, in which a comparison is made between the number of bits fed back for the unitary matrix, fed back using Givens feedback and CQI channel information, as opposed to the direct H matrix feedback. It can be seen that the complexity becomes increasingly comparable as a number of transmit antennas increases.
  • these are quantized as follows: ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 bit and c 1 ⁇ 1 bit ⁇ 2 ⁇ 2 bit and c 2 ⁇ 1 bit ⁇ 3 ⁇ 2 bit and c 3 ⁇ 1 bit
  • the quantization performed for the parameter ⁇ is more precise than that performed for the parameter C. It is generally the case that different quantization accuracies may be performed for the different parameters being fed back using given speed back. Through experimentation, it has been found that acceptable performance can be achieved with a less accurate C parameter. In some embodiments described below, certain C parameters can be ignored.
  • scalar quantization is performed for each of the parameters as discussed previously.
  • each Given matrix is associated with one or more eigen-modes and respective eigenvalue.
  • the V matrix is re-generated, and then only the selected eigen-modes used to transmit streams as in the above example for eigen-modes selection.
  • the full expansion above corresponds to all three eigenvectors of the channel.
  • the truncated expansion corresponds to only a single eigenvector.
  • the correspondence of eigenvector to Givens matrices is a known math property of Givens expansions.
  • is uniformly distributed resulting in more bits being needed for accurate feedback
  • C is non-uniformly distributed resulting in less bits being needed.
  • some C have only minimum impact on performance and can be treated as constant without a substantial performance penalty.
  • bit allocations can be employed to realize a full scalar quantizer.
  • # of Transmit Antennas 2 3 4 Givens matrix G1 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 Bits to represent 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 theta Bits to represent C 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Total bit allocation 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 to Givens Bit Allocation for Givens Feedback - Partial Scalar Quantization
  • the following is an example of bit allocation with partial scalar quantization for 2, 3 and 4 antennas. It can be seen that in a particular example, for the 3-antenna case for example, the C parameter is only fed back for the first of three Givens matrices, and a three bit value is sent back for theta for the first of the three matrices, and a one bit differential is used for theta for the other two matrices. This has the potential of reducing the number of feedback bits required from nine bits from the full quantization example given above to five bits for the example in the table.
  • the following table shows an example set of feedback allocations for different MIMO configurations using Givens feedback with full scalar quantization versus partial scalar quantization with a 1-bit differential for theta and 1-bit for c. It can be seen that the savings in the number of bits required for feedback increase as the complexity of the MIMO configuration increases. Also shown in the table are the number of bits required for a Hausholder based feedback mechanism.
  • each feedback element pertains to one parameter of interest.
  • This parameter can be a Givens parameter, or a channel matrix parameter from H or V for example, or some other value.
  • vector quantization is performed, in which each element fed back represents a vector, either in absolute terms or differential terms, and in respect of a set of parameters of interest.
  • Each potential state for the output of the vector quantization operation is represented by a code word identifier/index which is fed back, and used by the transmitter to look up the vector. The vectors thus looked up are then used to generate the beam former in the transmitter.
  • the vector might be a vector of a channel matrix, a vector of a V matrix (this would be a unitary vector), or a set of Givens parameters for example.
  • an SVD based Givens transform vector quantization algorithm employs Grassmann Subspace Packing.
  • Other forms of vector quantization may alternatively be employed.
  • Each individual Givens matrix is a unitary matrix.
  • the product of Givens matrices is a unitary matrix.
  • the partial product of two or more Givens matrices is a unitary matrix.
  • the resulting of unitary matrix may be quantized by using Grassmann sub-space packing (see for example D. J. Love, R. W. Heath Jr., and T. Strohmer, “Grassmannian Beamforming for Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Wireless Systems,” IEEE Transactions on Information Theory, vol. 49, pp. 2735-2747, October 2003).
  • the code book for quantization of a unitary matrix may be considered as sub-space packing in a Grassmann manifold.
  • codebooks that might be used include the uniform distributed Grassmann space, and Block circulant DFT, but other codebooks may alternatively be employed.
  • the input to the shape and gain quantizer is a vector to be quantized.
  • this vector is a column of a unitary V matrix, but it may not necessarily be so.
  • it may be a set of Givens parameters that are not necessarily unitary, or a vector of the channel matrix H.
  • the vector is normalized at 352 . Please note however that this step is only required if the input is not a unit length vector. V should consist of unitary columns and rows and as such this step can be skipped if the input is a column/row of the V matrix.
  • shape quantization is performed.
  • the magnitude can be taken at 354 and this quantized with gain quantizer 358 .
  • the shape and gain can be together fed back at 360 .
  • the gain quantization step is not needed if the input is unitary. For example, if a four element input vector is used, then a “codebook” of different four element vectors is developed to define the overall feedback space.
  • the shape quantizer determines which of the defined potential four element feedback vectors is closest to the input, and then all that needs to be fed back is the identity of this vector. This can then be looked up at the transmitter and used to re-generate the vector. In effect each vector is rounded off to the nearest vector in the code book. In a system in which there are 16 different codewords, the codeword can be uniquely identified by 4-bits. Thus, each column of the V matrix could be represented by 4-bits with this approach.
  • the receiver sets up criteria 360 are used to search for a minimum. Examples of receiver criteria have been set out above, but other examples can alternatively be employed.
  • the searching involves performing hypotheses testing against a set or dictionary of theta, c permutations 362 using the search minimum step 364 . Once the minimum has been found, the parameters representing the minimum are selected at 366 and fed back on the MTMO channel 336 as before.
  • Givens decomposition can be computed using any appropriate method. Iterative approaches may for example be employed such as Cholsky factorization and reverse order multiplication. These methods are known in the art and will not be described further here. It is noted that Givens decomposition is about 10% of the complexity of SVD computing complexity. This can be seen from the following table comparing the complexity of SVD versus Givens as a function of the number of transmit antennas, and the complexity is measured in terms of multiply and add operations.
  • the cross-correlation of the codeword in this example has a block circulant structure.
  • l opt arg ⁇ min l ⁇ ⁇ 1 , 2 , ⁇ ... ⁇ , L ⁇ ⁇ MSE ⁇ ⁇ E s N o ⁇ tr ⁇ ( I M + E s N o ⁇ N r ⁇ P l H ⁇ H H ⁇ HP l ) - 1 ⁇
  • V is quantized column by column and recursively.
  • ⁇ circumflex over (v) ⁇ 1 has the maximum inner product among all unit vectors in the codebook.
  • F 1 ⁇ V [ e j ⁇ 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 v ⁇ 11 v ⁇ 12 0.0 v ⁇ 21 v ⁇ 22 0.0 v ⁇ 31 v ⁇ 32 ] ⁇ ⁇
  • ⁇ v 2 [ v ⁇ 11 v ⁇ 12 v ⁇ 21 v ⁇ 22 v ⁇ 31 v ⁇ 32 ] where two properties are employed to get the result, i.e.
  • ⁇ circumflex over (v) ⁇ 11 is real and the unitary property of V Since both F 1 and V are unitary, V 2 is unitary. From STEP-2, we see that the size of V 2 is 3 by 2 and it is reduced from that of V 1 by one on both the row and column dimensions.
  • STEP-3 Quantize the first column of V 2 denoted as v 2 , using another codebook of unit 3-vectors, whose first element of each codeword is real.
  • STEP-4 Construct a Hausholder reflection matrix
  • F 2 STEP-5 Multiply F 2 with V 2 as follows.
  • the codebook is constructed such that the codeword vectors distribute on the n-dimension complex unit sphere uniformly. Additionally, the firs: element of each codeword is set to be real for the next step.
  • the Hausholder matrix can be computed and stored beforehand for small codebooks. Even in the case that there is no quantization error, the reconstructed matrix could be different from the original V by a global phase on each column and this is fine with closed loop MIMO.
  • a differential index feedback is provided as illustrated pictorially in FIG. 48 .
  • the differential index is representative of the sub-space searching. According to this embodiment the channel will not change very fast. Therefore, the indices of consecutive feedbacks will not be far from the previous feed-back.
  • a MIMO feedback channel ageing algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described, in which receiver ageing beam-former correction is utilized.
  • differential encoding is used to cross multiple sub-carriers to feedback the vector index or other feedback information.
  • the following is an example of a mini-tile modulation scheme for sending back a vector index of zero or one. Preferably this would be transmitted on two sub-carriers. In this case, two different phases are transmitted for vector index zero, and a different arrangement of the same phases is sent for vector index one.
  • FIG. 46 Another example is shown in FIG. 46 , this being a feedback approach that allows the transmission of one of eight different vector indexes can be used to transmit up to 3-bits of information.
  • the vector index might for example be an index of codebook, or alternatively the raw bits might be used to indicated feedback Information, be it channel feedback or Givens feedback or unitary matrix feedback.
  • a tile generally indicated at 370 is four sub-carriers by three symbols, and the four corner sub-carrier locations in the tile are used for transmitting pilot information. The remaining eight sub-carrier locations over the three symbols are used to transmit the vector index.
  • the encoding used for the index is indicated in the table generally indicated at 372 .
  • phase information In this example, four different phases are used, and a codeword consisting of eight phases is used to represent each of the potential vector indices.
  • the receiver of the feedback information can then recover the phase information and perform a correlation to identify the transmitted vector index and thereby recover the feedback information.
  • FIG. 47 Another example is shown in FIG. 47 for the case where a receiver has two antennas. In this case, pilot symbols are sent in different locations for the two antennas, but identical feedback information is sent on the remaining eight sub-carriers, the same as in FIG. 46 . For a given antennae is transmitting its pilot symbols.
  • FIG. 48 two different users are feeding back the two patterns indicated at 380 , 382 respectively. Similar to the two antenna case of FIG. 47 , each of the two users transmits pilots in different locations within the tile so as to not interfere with the other users pilots. In this case, each user transmits eight sub-carrier locations containing the vector index. The data transmitted by the two users will be different, and the receiver of the feedback information will need to distinguish between the two. According to an embodiment of the invention STTD antenna assignment with power weighting may be used. This reduces inter-code interference and reduces the feedback bandwidth required.
  • FIGS. 49 and 50 shows a concatenation of STC/MIMO with a beam-former in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • Embodiments provide transmitters adapted to generate signals containing the disclosed transmit code-sets/sub-carrier allocations methods of transmitting such signals, receivers adapted to receive such transmissions, and methods of receiving and decoding such signals.

Abstract

Systems and methods for closed loop MIMO (multiple input and multiple output) wireless communication are provided. Various transmit formats including spatial multiplexing and STTD are defined in which vector or matrix weighting is employed using information fed back from receivers. The feedback information may include channel matrix or SVD-based feedback.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/581,356 filed on Jun. 22, 2004, U.S. Provisional patent Application No. 60/582,298 filed on Jun. 24, 2004, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/601,178 filed on Aug. 13, 2004, Provisional Patent Application No. 60/514,621 filed on Sep. 30, 2004, Provisional Patent Application No. 60/619,461 filed on Oct. 15, 2004 and Provisional Patent Application No. 60/642,697 filed on Jan. 10, 2005, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention relates to MIMO (multiple input, multiple output) systems and methods.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • In MIMO (multiple input multiple output) OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) systems, there are multiple transmit antennas and multiple receive antennas and a plurality of sub-carriers that are available for transmission between the transmit antennas and the receive antennas for either one or multiple users. New advances in MIMO OFDM systems are taught in Applicant's co-pending application <attorney docket 71493-1320> entitled “Pilot Design For OFDM Systems With Four transmit Antennas” filed Mar. 15, 2005, and in Applicant's co-pending application <attorney docket 71493-1330) entitled “Wireless Communication Methods, Systems, And Signal Structures” filed Apr. 4, 2005, both hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. With open loop implementations, the transmitter transmits on the multiple transmitter antennas and sub-carriers without the benefit of channel information fed back from the receivers.
  • Efforts have been made to facilitate wireless closed-loop MIMO communications including broadband closed-loop MIMO, which might for example be based on OFDM modulation schemes, and narrowband closed-loop MIMO. Broadband closed-loop MIMO includes many sub-bands. Each of these sub-bands requires MTMO channel feedback for a closed-loop implementation. As a result the feedback resources required for broadband closed-loop MIMO can become quite large. Narrowband closed-loop MIMO, by comparison, includes one or a few sub-bands and requires a relatively smaller amount of feedback resources. Broadband and narrowband MIMO, therefore, have different applications.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • According to one broad aspect, the invention provides a MIMO system comprising: a transmitter having multiple transmit antennas; at least one receiver, each receiver having at least one receive antenna; each receiver being adapted to transmit at least one type of feedback information selected from a group consisting of: information for use in performing beam-forming; antenna selection/grouping information.
  • In some embodiments, a transmission format to each receiver is selected from a group of transmission formats consisting of: spatial multiplexing; vector weighted spatial multiplexing; matrix weighted spatial multiplexing; K-stream spatial multiplexing employing more than K transmit antennas; single stream STTD; single stream STTD with proportional weighting and antenna selection; multi-stream STTD; multi-stream STUD with layer weighting; multi-stream STTD with a combination of layer weighting and proportional weighting; and hybrid beam-forming and spatial multiplexing.
  • In some embodiments, a defined sub-set of available formats is made available for a given receiver, and wherein the given receiver feeds back a selection of one of the defined sub-set of available formats.
  • In some embodiments, each receiver performs respective channel measurements and feeds back information for use in performing beam-forming based on the respective channel measurements.
  • In some embodiments, the information for use in performing beam-forming is selected from a group consisting of: a) elements of a measured channel matrix; b) elements of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; c) parameters of a Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; d) parameters of a truncated Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix, where one or more eigen-vectors are discarded; e) differentially encoded elements of a measured channel matrix; f) differentially encoded elements of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; g) differentially encoded parameters of a Givens decomposition or truncated Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix; h) Householder decomposition; i) full scalar quantization of any of the information types of a) through h); j) partial scalar quantization of any of the information types a) through g); k) scalar quantization of any one of the information types a) through h) where varying resolution is used to quantize parameters; l) vector quantization of any of the information types of a) through h); m) a combination of scalar quantization and differential quantization for any of the information types a) through h); n) using a Delta Sigma quantizer for any of the information types a) through h); o) binary beam-forming weights; p) a differential index into a set of vector quantizations; and q) pre-defined codebook.
  • In some embodiments beam-forming feedback is performed by each receiver as a function of receiver specific criteria.
  • In some embodiments, the receiver specific criteria is selected from a group consisting of: Max SNR; b) Max Shannon capacity; and c) True receiver operational process.
  • In some embodiments, antenna selection/grouping information is at least one information type selected from a group consisting of: a) selection between SM (spatial multiplexing) and STTD (space time transmit diversity) transmission format; b) selection of particular antennas for SM transmission; c) selection and grouping of particular antennas for STTD transmission; and d) eigen-mode selection information.
  • In some embodiments, the system further comprises the receiver determining the antenna selection/grouping information by performing a step selected from a group of steps consisting of: performing SVD decomposition and discarding weak eigen-modes; selecting antennas using determinants of sub-MIMO channel matrices.
  • In some embodiments, feed back and beam-forming and/or antenna selection/grouping is performed for sub-carriers of a multi-carrier system to a resolution selected from a group consisting of: a) for every sub-carrier individually; b) for groups of consecutive sub-carriers; c) for an entire set of sub-carriers; d) for sets of groups of sub-carriers.
  • In some embodiments, transmission matrices and feedback are in accordance with one of FIGS. 11 to 14.
  • In some embodiments, the transmitter transmits pilots on each transmit antenna for use in performing channel estimation.
  • In some embodiments, at least some of the pilots are punctured pilots.
  • In some embodiments, at least some of the pilots comprise un-coded pilots for use by multiple receivers.
  • In some embodiments, the pilots comprise user specific pre-coded pilots for use by particular receivers receivers.
  • In some embodiments, the pilots comprise user specific pre-coded pilots for use by particular receivers receivers and un-coded pilots for use by multiple receivers.
  • In some embodiments, the pilot patterns are as shown in any one of FIGS. 17-23 with generalizations as described.
  • In some embodiments, the pilot patterns are as shown in one of FIGS. 26-31 with generalizations as described.
  • In some embodiments, feedback information is transmitted using a feedback channel having the structure of one of FIGS. 46 to 48 with generalizations as described.
  • In some embodiments, at least one receiver has a plurality of receive antennas.
  • In some embodiments, the at least one receiver comprises a plurality of receivers.
  • In some embodiments, sub-channels are defined using at least one of; AMC sub-channels, where respective adaptive modulation and coding is defined for each AMC sub-channel; PUSC sub-channels.
  • In another embodiment, a receiver is provided that is adapted to implement receiver functionality as summarized above.
  • In another embodiment, a transmitter is provided that is adapted to implement transmitter functionality as summarized above.
  • Other aspects and features of the present invention will become apparent to those ordinarily skilled in the art upon review of the following description of specific embodiments of the invention in conjunction with the accompanying figures.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • Preferred embodiments of the invention will now be described with reference to the attached drawings in which:
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram representation of a cellular communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram representation of a base station according to one embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram representation of a mobile terminal according to one embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 4 is a logical breakdown of an OFDM transmitter architecture according to one embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 5 is a logical breakdown of an OFDM receiver architecture according to one embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 6 is a first example schematic diagram for beam-forming spatial multiplexing (SM) transmission using matrix or vector weighting according to an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 7 is a second example schematic diagram for beam-forming SM transmission with matrix weighting according to an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for use in describing antenna/sub-channel selection criteria;
  • FIG. 9 is a graphical comparison of fixed D-STTD (double-space-time time division) and antenna grouping D-STTD;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of sub-channel allocation for a 4-antenna transmitter and two 2-antenna receivers according to an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 11 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 3-transmit antenna grouping arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 12 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 3-transmit antenna selection arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 13 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 4-transmit antenna arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 14 is a closed loop STC/MIMO 4-transmit antenna arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIGS. 15 and 16 show binary unitary beam-forming matrices in accordance with embodiments of the invention;
  • FIG. 17 is pilot mapping for a pilot allocation for 4-antenna BS (base station) for the optional FUSC (full utilization sub-channel) and Optional AMC (adaptive modulation and coding) zones in 802.16d in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIGS. 18 and 19 are pilot mappings for a pilot allocation for four transmit antennas in which there is no puncturing required in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 are pilot mappings for a pilot allocation for eight transmit antennas in accordance with an embodiments of the invention;
  • FIGS. 22 and 23 are pilot mappings for a pilot allocation for twelve transmit antennas in accordance-with an embodiments of the invention;
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram showing an example of pre-coding of MIMO pilots in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing an example of pre-coding of MIMO pilots in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for larger antenna arrays;
  • FIG. 26 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 27 is a second pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 28 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 3-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 29 is a pilot mapping showing a pilot design for a 4-antenna basestation (BS) for optional AMC in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 30 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna BS for PUSC (partial utilization sub-channel) zone in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 31 is a pilot mapping showing a pre-coded pilot design for a 4-antenna ES for PUSC zone in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of a set of closed loop STC/MIMO arrangements with beam-former structures in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIGS. 33, 34, 35 and 36 present a comparison of SVD (singular value decomposition) to antenna grouping;
  • FIG. 37 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention in which MIMO channel and CQI (channel quality indication) are separately fed back;
  • FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with another embodiment of the invention in which MIMO channel and CQI are jointly fed back;
  • FIG. 39 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention featuring 1 bit DPCM;
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention and using a 1 bit AZ modulator;
  • FIG. 41 is a block diagram of a system employing a direct differential encoding in accordance with an embodiment of the invention for multiple users;
  • FIG. 42 contains a table of various direct differential encoding feedback in accordance with embodiments of the invention;
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram of a system employing an SVD based Givens transform feedback in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 44 is another example of an SVD based Givens transform in accordance with an embodiment of the invention in which a further spherical code based quantization is performed;
  • FIG. 45 is a block diagram of a system employing a receiver based Givens transform in accordance with an embodiment of the invention;
  • FIG. 46 is an example of space-time coding for use on a CQICH (channel quality indication channel) in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for a single input single output application;
  • FIG. 47 is an example of space-time coding for CQICH in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for supporting STUD;
  • FIG. 48 is an example of space-time coding for CQICH in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for SM (spatial multiplexing);
  • FIGS. 49 and 50 are a set of tables for concatenation of STC (space-time coding)/MIMO with a beam-former in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • General Background and Example System Overview The following provides a glossary of some of the terms used in this application:
  • AMC—Adaptive Coding and Modulation
  • BS or BTS—Base Station
  • CL_MIMO—Closed Loop MIMO
  • CQI—Channel Quality Indicator
  • CQICF—CQI channel
  • DFT—Discrete Fourier Transform
  • FB—Feedback
  • FDD—Frequency Duplex
  • FFT—Fast Fourier Transform
  • MIMO—Multiple Input Multiple Output
  • MLD—Maximum Likelihood Detector
  • MSE—Minimum square error
  • MSS—Mobile Subscriber Station
  • PUSC—Partially Utilized Sub-Channel
  • QoS—Quality of service
  • SISO—Single Input Single Output
  • SVD—Singular Value Decomposition
  • STTD—Space Time Transmit Diversity
  • SM—Spatial Multiplexing
  • SQ—Scalar Quantize
  • TDD—Time Duplex
  • VQ—Vector Quantize
  • For purposes of providing context for the embodiments described below, an example OFDM system will now be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. 1 shows a base station controller (BSC) 10 which controls wireless communications within multiple cells 12, which cells are served by corresponding base stations (BS) 14. In general, each base station 14 facilitates communications using OFDM with mobile terminals 16, which are within the cell 12 associated with the corresponding base station 14. The movement of the mobile terminals 16 in relation to the base stations 14 results in significant fluctuation in channel conditions. As illustrated, the base stations 14 and mobile terminals 16 may include multiple antennas to provide spatial diversity for communications.
  • An example of a high level overview of the mobile terminals 16 and base stations 14 that may be used with embodiments of the present invention is provided prior to delving into the structural and functional details of the preferred embodiments. Wish reference to FIG. 2, a base station 14 configured according to one embodiment of the present invention is illustrated. The base station 14 generally includes a control system 20, a baseband processor 22, transmit circuitry 24, receive circuitry 26, multiple antennas 28, and a network interface 30. The receive circuitry 26 receives radio frequency signals bearing information from one or more remote transmitters provided by mobile terminals 16 (illustrated in FIG. 3). Preferably, a low noise amplifier and a filter (not shown) cooperate to amplify and remove broadband interference from the signal for processing. Downconversion and digitization circuitry (not shown) will then downconvert the filtered, received signal to an intermediate or baseband frequency signal, which is then digitized into one or more digital streams.
  • The baseband processor 22 processes the digitized received signal to extract the information or data bits conveyed in the received signal. This processing typically comprises demodulation, decoding, and error correction operations. As such, the baseband processor 22 is generally implemented in one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs). The received information is then sent across a wireless network via the network interface 30 or transmitted to another mobile terminal 16 serviced by the base station 14.
  • On the transmit side, the baseband processor 22 receives digitized data, which may represent voice, data, or control information, from the network interface 30 under the control of control system 20, and encodes the data for transmission. The encoded data is output to the transmit circuitry 24, where it is modulated by a carrier signal having a desired transmit frequency or frequencies. A power amplifier (not shown) will amplify the modulated carrier signal to a level appropriate for transmission, and deliver the modulated carrier signal to the antennas 28 through a matching network (not shown). Modulation and processing details are described in greater detail below.
  • With reference to FIG. 3, a mobile terminal 16 configured according to one embodiment of the present invention is illustrated. Similar to the base station 14, the mobile terminal 16 will include a control system 32, a baseband processor 34, transmit circuitry 36, receive circuitry 38, multiple antennas 40, and user interface circuitry 42. The receive circuitry 38 receives radio frequency signals bearing information from one or more base stations 14. Preferably, a low noise amplifier and a filter (not shown) cooperate to amplify and remove broadband interference from the signal for processing. Downconversion and digitization circuitry (not shown) will then downconvert the filtered, received signal to an intermediate or baseband frequency signal, which is then digitized into one or more digital streams.
  • The baseband processor 34 processes the digitized received signal to extract the information or data bits conveyed in the received signal. This processing typically comprises demodulation, decoding, and error correction operations, as will be discussed on greater detail below. The baseband processor 34 is generally implemented in one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) and application specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
  • For transmissions the baseband processor 34 receives digitized data, which may represent voice, data, or control information, from the control system 32, which it encodes for transmission. The encoded data is output to the transmit circuitry 36, where it is used by a modulator to modulate a carrier signal that is at a desired transmit frequency or frequencies. A power amplifier (not shown) will amplify the modulated carrier signal to a level appropriate for transmission, and deliver the modulated carrier signal to the antennas 40 through a matching network (not shown). Various modulation and processing techniques available to those skilled in the art are applicable to the present invention.
  • In OFDM modulation, the transmission band is divided into multiple, orthogonal carrier waves. Each carrier wave is modulated according to the digital data to be transmitted. Because OFDM divides the transmission band into multiple carriers, the bandwidth per carrier decreases and the modulation time per carrier increases. Since the multiple carriers are transmitted in parallel, the transmission rate for the digital data, or symbols, on any given carrier is lower than when a single carrier is used.
  • OFDM modulation typically employs the performance of an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on the information to be transmitted. For demodulations a Fast Fourier Transform (FFlT) is typically performed on the received signal to recover the transmitted information. In practice, the IFFT and FFT are provided by digital signal processing carrying out an Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) and Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), respectively. Accordingly, the characterizing feature of OFDM modulation is that orthogonal carrier wave are generated for multiple bands within a transmission channel. The modulated signals are digital signals having a relatively low transmission rate and capable of staying within their respective bands. The individual carrier waves are not modulated directly by the digital signals. Instead, all carrier waves are modulated at once by IFFT processing.
  • In the preferred embodiment, OFDM is used for at least the downlink transmission from the base stations 14 to the mobile terminals 16. Each base station 14 is equipped with N transmit antennas 28, and each mobile terminal 16 is equipped with M receive antennas 40. Notably, the respective antennas can be used for reception and transmission using appropriate duplexers or switches.
  • With reference to FIG. 4, a logical OFDM transmission architecture is provided according to one embodiment. Initially, the base station controller 10 will send data to be transmitted to various mobile terminals 16 to the base station 14. The base station 14 may use the CQIs associated with the mobile terminals to schedule the data for transmission as well as select appropriate coding and modulation for transmitting the scheduled data. The CQIs may be directly from the mobile terminals 16 or determined at the base station 14 based on information provided by the mobile terminals 16. In either case, the CQI for each mobile terminal 16 is a function of the degree to which the channel amplitude (or response) varies across the OFDM frequency band.
  • The scheduled data 44, which is a stream of bits, is scrambled in a manner reducing the peak-to-average power ratio associated with the data using data scrambling logic 46. A cyclic redundancy check (CPC) for the scrambled data is determined and appended to the scrambled data using CAC adding logic 48. Next, channel coding is performed using channel encoder logic 50 to effectively add redundancy to the data to facilitate recovery and error correction at the mobile terminal 16. The channel coding for a particular mobile terminal 16 may be based on the CQI. The channel encoder logic 50 uses known Turbo encoding techniques in one embodiment. The encoded data is then processed by rate matching logic 52 to compensate for the data expansion associated with encoding.
  • Bit interleaver logic 54 systematically reorders the bits in the encoded data to minimize the loss of consecutive data bits. The resultant data bits are systematically mapped into corresponding symbols depending on the chosen baseband modulation by mapping logic 56. Preferably, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) or Quadrature Phase Shift Key (QPSK) modulation is used. The degree of modulation is preferably chosen based on the CQI for the particular mobile terminal. The symbols may be systematically reordered to further bolster the immunity of the transmitted signal to periodic data loss caused by frequency selective fading using symbol interleaver logic 58.
  • At this point, groups of bits have been mapped into symbols representing locations in an amplitude and phase constellation. Then spatial diversity is desired, blocks of symbols are then processed by space-time block code (STC) encoder logic 60, which modifies the symbols in a fashion making the transmitted signals more resistant to interference and more readily decoded at a mobile terminal 16. The STC encoder logic 60 will process the incoming symbols and provide N outputs corresponding to the number of transmit antennas 28 for the base station 14. The control system 20 and/or baseband processor 22 will provide a mapping control signal to control STC encoding. At this point, assume the symbols for the N outputs are representative of the data to be transmitted and capable of being recovered by the mobile terminal 16. See A. F. Naguib, N. Seshadri, and A. R. Calderbank, “Applications of space-time codes and interference suppression for high capacity and high data rate wireless systems,” Thirty-Second Asilomar Conference on Signals, Systems & Computers, Volume 2, pp. 1803-1810, 1998, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • For the present example, assume the base station 14 has two antennas 2 a (N=2) and the STC encoder logic 60 provides two output streams of symbols. Accordingly, each of the symbol streams output by the STC encoder logic 60 is sent to a corresponding IFFT processor 62, illustrated separately for ease of understanding. Those skilled in the art will recognize that one or more processors may be used to provide such digital signal processing, alone or in combination with other processing described herein. The IFFT processors 62 will preferably operate on the respective symbols to provide an-inverse Fourier Transform. The output of the IFFT processors 62 provides symbols in the time domain. The time domain symbols are grouped into frames, which are associated with a prefix by like insertion logic 64. Each of the resultant signals is up-converted in the digital domain to an intermediate frequency and converted to an analog signal via the corresponding digital up-conversion (DUC) and digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion circuitry 66. The resultant (analog) signals are then simultaneously modulated at the desired RF frequency, amplified, and transmitted via the RF circuitry 68 and antennas 28. Notably, pilot signals known by the intended mobile terminal 11 are scattered among the sub-carriers. The mobile terminal 16, which is discussed in detail below, will use the pilot signals for channel estimation.
  • Reference is now made to FIG. 5 to illustrate reception of the transmitted signals by a mobile terminal 16. Upon arrival of the transmitted signals at each of the antennas 40 of the mobile terminal 16, the respective signals are demodulated and amplified by corresponding RF circuitry 70. For the sake of conciseness and clarity, only one of the two receive paths is described and illustrated in detail. Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter and down-conversion circuitry 72 digitizes and downconverts the analog signal for digital processing. The resultant digitized signal may be used by automatic gain control circuitry (AGC) 74 to control the gain of the amplifiers in the RF circuitry 70 based on the received signal level.
  • Initially, the digitized signal is provided to synchronization logic 76, which includes coarse synchronization logic 78, which buffers several OFDM symbols and calculates an auto-correlation between the two successive OFDM symbols. A resultant time index corresponding to the maximum of the correlation result determines a fine synchronization search window, which is used by fine synchronization logic 80 to determine a precise framing starting position based on the headers. The output of the fine synchronization logic 80 facilitates frame acquisition by frame alignment logic 84. Proper framing alignment is important so that subsequent FFT processing provides an accurate conversion from the time to the frequency domain. The fine synchronization algorithm is based on the correlation between the received pilot signals carried by the headers and a local copy of the known pilot data. Once frame alignment acquisition occurs, the prefix of the OFDM symbol is removed with prefix removal logic 86 and resultant samples are sent to frequency offset correction logic 88, which compensates for the system frequency offset caused by the unmatched local oscillators in the transmitter and the receiver. Preferably, the synchronization logic 76 includes frequency offset and clock estimation logic 82, which is based on the headers to help estimate such effects on the transmitted signal and provide those estimations to the correction logic 88 to properly process OFDM symbols.
  • At this point, the OFDM symbols in the time domain are ready for conversion to the frequency domain using FFT processing logic 90. The results are frequency domain symbols, which are sent to processing logic 92. The processing logic 92 extracts the scattered pilot signal using scattered pilot extraction logic 94, determines a channel estimate based on the extracted pilot signal using channel estimation logic 96, and provides channel responses for all sub-carriers using channel reconstruction logic 98. In order to determine a channel response for each of the sub-carriers, the pilot signal is multiple pilot symbols that are scattered among the data symbols throughout the OFDM sub-carriers in a known pattern in both time and frequency. Continuing with FIG. 5, the processing logic compares the received pilot symbols with the pilot symbols that are expected in certain sub-carriers at certain times to determine a channel response for the sub-carriers in which pilot symbols were transmitted. The results are interpolated to estimate a channel response for most, if not all, of the remaining sub-carriers for which pilot symbols were not provided. The actual and interpolated channel responses are used to estimate an overall channel response, which includes the channel responses for most, if not all, of the sub-carriers in the OFDM channel.
  • The frequency domain symbols and channel reconstruction information, which are derived from the channel responses for each receive path are provided to an STC decoder 100, which provides STC decoding on both received paths to recover the transmitted symbols. The channel reconstruction information provides equalization information to the STC decoder 100 sufficient to remove the effects of the transmission channel when processing the respective frequency domain symbols
  • The recovered symbols are placed back in order using symbol de-interleaver logic 102, which corresponds to the symbol interleaver logic 58 of the transmitter. The de-interleaved symbols are then demodulated or de-mapped to a corresponding bitstream using de-mapping logic 104. The bits are then de-interleaved using bit de-interleaver logic 106, which corresponds to the bit interleaver logic 54 of the transmitter architecture. The de-interleaved bits are then processed by rate de-matching logic 108 and presented to channel decoder logic 10 to recover the initially scrambled data and the CRC checksum. Accordingly, CRC logic 112 removes the CRC checksum, checks the scrambled data in traditional fashion, and provides it to the de-scrambling logic 114 for de-scrambling using the known base station de-scrambling code to recover the originally transmitted data 116.
  • In parallel to recovering the data 116, a CQI, or at least information sufficient to create a CQI at the base station 14, is determined and transmitted to the base station 14. As noted above, the CQI in a preferred embodiment is a function of the carrier-to-interference ratio (CR), as well as the degree to which the channel response varies across the various sub-carriers in the OFDM frequency band. For this embodiment, the channel gain for each sub-carrier in the OFDM frequency band being used to transmit information are compared relative to one another to determine the degree to which the channel gain varies across the OFDM frequency band. Although numerous techniques are available to measure the degree of variation, one technique is to calculate the standard deviation of the channel gain for each sub-carrier throughout the OFDM frequency band being used to transmit data.
  • It is to be understood that the FIGS. 1 through 5 are for the purpose of providing an example system within which the closed loop MIMO embodiments described below can be applied. More generally, they can be applied in any system with multiple transmit antennas and multiple receive antennas, the particular number of transmit antennas and receive antennas being an implementation specific decision. Most of the embodiments are applicable to wide-band multi-carrier systems such as OFDM. However, they may also be applied to narrow band closed loop MIMO and even to single carrier closed loop MIMO. It is clear from the description that follows which embodiments would be applicable to a single carrier versus a multi-carrier context exclusively.
  • The embodiments set forth below represent the necessary information to enable those skilled in the art to practice the invention and illustrate the best mode of practicing the invention. Upon reading the following description in light of the accompanying drawing figures, those skilled in the art will understand the concepts of the invention and will recognize applications of these concepts not particularly addressed herein. It should be understood that these concepts and applications fall within the scope of the disclosure and the accompanying claims. While the embodiments can be applied in a system such as exemplified in FIGS. 1 to 5 described above, embodiments are in no way limited to such application,
  • Transmission Formats for Closed Loop MIMO
  • Various Transmission formats are provided for closed loop MIMO air-interface designs. MIMO transmission formats and signalling apparatus are generalized to allow a variety MIMO schemes to operate using the same air-interface design. According to one aspect of the invention, basic transmission formats include: (1) spatial multiplexing (SM) and (2) space-time transmit diversity (STTD), with vector or matrix weighted full MIMO or sub-MIMO transmission based on various transmit antennas configurations. These formats can be used in single or multi-carrier configurations. The schemes can also be generalized to cover multiple base station transmission.
  • Some embodiments feature a receiver selecting between various available transmit formats. The particular formats to include in a given system are implementation specific.
  • Spatial Multiplexing (BLAST)
  • BLAST is also called spatial multiplexing (SM). This transmission format allows maximum parallel transmission of data streams and can achieve a theoretical capacity limit.
  • For an open loop M×N MIMO SM transmission (M transmit antennas and N receive antennas), basic transmission matrices are presented below in Table 1 for up to four transmit antennas. It is readily apparent how similar transmission matrices can be constructed for numbers of transmit antennas larger than four.
    TABLE 1
    Basic SM matrices
    2-transmit 3-transmit 4-transmit
    matrix-A matrix-B matrix-C
    Time k Time k Time k
    Tx1 [ s 1 s 2 ] [ s 1 s 2 s 3 ] [ s 1 s 2 s 3 s 4 ]
    Tx2
    Tx3
    Tx4
  • For M transmit antenna SM, there can be N receiver antennas with N≧M. Where N<M for a given receiver, antenna selection can be performed to identify a subset of the M transmit antennas for use in BLAST transmission to the receiver. Mechanisms for performing antenna selection are described below.
  • Vector Weighted Closed Loop SM Transmission
  • For M×N MIMO vector weighted SM transmission according to an embodiment of the invention, the transmission matrices are presented below in Table 2 for up to four transmit antennas. It is readily apparent how vector weighted SM matrices can be extended to handle more than four transmit antennas. With vector weighted closed loop transmission, each symbol is transmitted on a single transmit antenna and a single weight is applied to each such symbol. Other users can then be supported using the remaining antenna(s).
    TABLE 2
    Vector weighted SM matrices
    2-transmit 3-transmit 4-transmit
    matrix-A matrix-B matrix-C
    Time k Time k Time k
    Tx1 [ w 1 s 1 w 2 s 2 ] [ w 1 s 1 w 2 s 2 w 3 s 3 ] [ w 1 s 1 w 2 s 2 w 3 s 3 w 4 s 4 ]
    Tx2
    Tx3
    Tx4
  • Vector weighted SM allows, for example, per antenna power allocation and balancing, SINR optimization from the receiver, and joint transmit-receive closed loop optimization as a Weiner solution. For M transmit antenna vector weighted SM, there can be N receiver antennas with N≧M, Where N<M for a given receiver, antenna selection can be performed to identify a subset of the M transmit antennas for use in BLAST transmission to the receiver. Mechanisms for performing antenna selection are described below. Other users can then be supported using the remaining antenna(s)
  • Matrix Weighted Closed Loop SM Transmission
  • M×N MIMO matrix weighted SM transmission according to an embodiment of the invention has associated transmission matrices as shown in Table 3, where 2, 3 and 4 transmit antenna matrices are shown. As in the previous examples, it is readily apparent how matrix weighted SM transmission matrices can be extended to handle more than four transmit antennas. With matrix weighted spatial multiplexing, each symbol is represented on multiple transmit antennas with a respective weight. However, depending upon the weight selected, a given symbol may not necessarily be represented on all transmit antennas. Different examples of this are presented below.
    TABLE 3
    Matrix weighted SM matrices
    2-transmit 3-transmit 4-transmit matrix-
    matrix-A matrix-B C
    Time k Time k Time k
    Tx1 [ w 1 s 1 + w 2 s 2 w 3 s 1 + w 4 s 2 ] [ w 1 s 1 + w 2 s 2 + w 3 s 3 w 4 s 1 + w 5 s 2 + w 6 s 3 w 7 s 1 + w 8 s 2 + w 9 s 3 ] [ w 1 s 1 + w 2 s 2 + w 3 s 3 + w 4 s 4 w 5 s 1 + w 6 s 2 + w 7 s 3 + w 8 s 4 w 9 s 1 + w 10 s 2 + w 11 s 3 + w 12 s 4 w 13 s 1 + w 14 s 2 + w 15 s 3 + w 16 s 4 ]
    Tx2
    Tx3
    Tx4
  • The matrix weighted M×N SM transmission can be applied to a single user reception application where N≧M or to the multi-user concurrent transmission cases, such as 2×2×1, 4×4×1, 4×2×2, for example. In the above examples, 2×2×1 for example, means two transmit antennas, two users, and each user having one receive antenna. Where N<M for a given receiver, antenna selection can be performed to identify a subset of the M transmit antennas for use in BLAST transmission to the receiver. Mechanisms for performing antenna selection are described below. Other users can then be supported using the remaining antenna(s).
  • Tables 4 to 6 and FIGS. 6 and 7 below provide illustrative examples of single and multi-user configurations of vector and matrix weighted SM beam-formers. Referring first to Table 4, this is a set of example configurations for the two transmit antenna case, i.e., using the 2-transmit matrix-A of Table 3 describe above. Two different transmissions formats are shown with format-1 shown in the first row and format-2 shown in the second row. With format-1 a single user is assigned to the entire stream mapping. With format-2, a first user is assigned to symbol s1 in the stream mapping and a second user is assigned to a symbol 52 in the stream mapping. Thus, either one user is given both symbols of each pair, or two users are each given a single symbol in each pair. The transmit beam-forming that is performed is the same in both cases, however, the weights/feedback information will be different for one user as opposed to two users. The three right hand columns in Table 4 show various options for feeding back channel information. These will be expanded upon in much more detail below. For this example and the other examples below, the feedback options shown consist of feeding back the channel matrix or a portion thereof for a given user, with the form of the channel matrix or portion thereof being shown in the table, or feeding back unitary matrix information, vector information that may be quantized. The symbol “x” simply indicates that this option is available for each of the formats. With the example of Table 4, for format-1 the entire channel matrix can be fed back from the single receiver to the transmitter. Format-2, a first user would only transmit back a portion of the channel matrix, namely h11, h12. The other user would similarly transmit a portion of the channel matrix back, namely h21, h22. In the table, the values w1, w2, w3 and w4 are the weights that are applied in transmit beam-forming. These weights are determined as a function of the feedback information received. These weights are described in much more detail below. Note that in a typical implementation, only one of the various feedback options would be implemented. While the table shows three different feedback options, a larger number of feedback options are described below and any of these can be used in a given implementation.
    TABLE 4
    Configuration of Matrix weighted SM matrix-A
    User Stream Transmit Channel Unitary Compressed
    Assignment Mapping Beam-forming Matrix Matrix/Vecter Quantizer
    FORMAT-1 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 ] [ w 1 s 1 + w 2 s 2 w 3 s 1 + w 4 s 2 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 21 h 22 ] x x
    FORMAT-2 User-1 user-2 [ s 1 s 2 ] [ h 11 h 12 ] [ h 21 h 22 ] x x x x
  • FIG. 6 provides an example of beam-forming SM transmission of matrix weighted matrix-A, wherein a first configuration generally indicated by 100 corresponds to a single user format with matrix weighting and a second configuration generally indicated by 110 corresponds to a multi-user format with matrix weighting.
  • The first configuration 100 is for a single user. The user input is indicated at 102, this consisting of two symbols x1, x2 at a given instant. These two inputs are then multiplied beam-forming weights in a beam-former 104 that implements beam-forming matrix G 1 104. The output of the beam-former 104 is then fed to a pair of transmit antennas 106. In the event of a matrix weighting, the beam-forming matrix corresponds to that of matrix-A for Table 3 above. A similar structure exists in the event of vector weighting (not shown), in which case the beam-forming matrix would correspond to matrix-A of Table 2 described above.
  • For the second configuration, generally indicated at 110, there are two separate user inputs indicated at 112, 114 respectively. Each of the two user inputs are multiplied by a respective vector with the first input 112 being multiplied by V 1 113, and the second input being multiplied by V 2 115. The outputs of these vector multiplications are summed on a per element basis in adders 116,118. The output of the first adder 116 is fed to the first transmit antenna 120 and the output of the second adder 118 is fed to the second transmit antenna 122. The two vector multiplications V 1 113, V 2 115 collectively implement the beam-forming operation of matrix-A of Table 3. Given that it is a multi-user format, it also corresponds to the transmission format-2 of Table 4 above.
  • Table 5 below provides similar information to that described in Table 4 above, but for a three transmit antenna case. In other words, this is elaborating the details of transmit formats available for the matrix weighted SM matrix-B described above in Table 3. The options available with a three transmit case are to use all three streams for a single user as indicated at format-1 in the first row, to use one of the three symbol streams for a first user and the remaining two symbol streams for a second user as shown in format-2 in the second row, and to assign a different user to each of the three streams as shown in format-3 in the third row. In all cases, the transmit beam-forming matrix has the same structure. The feedback options are again listed in the right hand three columns of Table 5.
    TABLE 5
    Configuration of Matrix weighted SM matrix-B
    FEEADBACK OPTIONS
    TRANSMISSION FORMATS Unitary
    User Stream Transmit Beam- Channel Matrix/ Compressed
    Assignment Mapping forming Matrix Vector Quantizer
    FORMAT-1 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 21 h 22 h 23 h 31 h 32 h 33 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 21 h 22 h 23 h 31 h 32 h 33 ] x x
    FORMAT-2 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 ] x x
    User-2 [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 21 h 22 h 23 ] x x
    FORMAT-3 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 ] x x
    User-2 [ h 21 h 22 h 23 ]
    User-3 [ h 31 h 32 h 33 ]
  • Similarly, the configurations available for a four transmit antenna configuration with matrix weighting are shown in Table 6 below. A single user format is shown in the first row; two user formats are shown in the second and fourth rows, a three user format is shown in the third row, and a four user format is shown in the fifth row. It is to be understood that not all of the potential formats have been exhaustively shown in Table 6. In all cases, the transmit beam-forming matrix has the same structure, and the feedback options for the different formats are shown in the right hand three columns of Table 6.
    TABLE 6
    Configuration of Matrix weighted SM matrix-C
    FEEDBACK OPTIONS
    TRANSMISSION FORMATS Unitary
    User Stream Matrix/ Compressed
    Assignment Mapping Transmit Beam-forming Channel Matrix Vector Quantizer
    FORMAT-1 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 s 4 ] [ w 1 s 1 + w 2 s 2 + w 3 s 3 + w 4 s 4 w 5 s 1 + w 6 s 2 + w 7 s 3 + w 8 s 4 w 9 s 1 + w 10 s 2 + w 11 s 3 + w 12 s 4 w 13 s 1 + w 14 s 2 + w 15 s 3 + w 16 s 4 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 14 h 21 h 22 h 23 h 24 h 31 h 32 h 33 h 34 h 41 h 42 h 43 h 44 ] x x
    FORMAT-2 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 s 4 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 14 h 21 h 22 h 23 h 24 ] x x
    User-2 [ h 31 h 32 h 33 h 34 h 41 h 42 h 43 h 44 ] x x
    FORMAT-3 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 s 4 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 14 ] x x
    User-2 [ h 21 h 22 h 23 h 24 ] x x
    User-3 [ h 31 h 32 h 33 h 34 h 41 h 42 h 43 h 44 ] x x
    FORMAT-4 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 s 4 ] [ h 21 h 22 h 23 h 24 ] x x
    User-2 x x
    FORMAT-5 User-1 [ s 1 s 2 s 3 s 4 ] [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 14 ] x x
    User-2 [ h 21 h 22 h 23 h 24 ] x x
    User-3 [ h 31 h 32 h 33 h 34 ] x x
    User-4 [ h 41 h 42 h 43 h 44 ] x x
  • FIG. 7 shows two examples of beam-forming SM transmission of Matrix weighted matrix-C. A first configuration, generally indicated at 130, corresponds to format-1 of Table 6 above, namely a format in which a single user is transmitting on all four antennas. The single user's data inputs are indicated at 132; these are processed by beam-forming matrix G 1 134 the output of which is transmitted on four antennas 136.
  • The second configuration shown in FIG. 2, generally indicated at 140, corresponds to format-2 of Table 6 described above, namely a format in which there are two users each of which occupy two of the streams. The first user's input is indicated at 142, and the second user's input is indicated at 144. The entire arrangement indicated at 146 performs a beam-forming operation on the two user inputs. This involves multiplying user 1 input by matrix G 1 147 and user 2 input 144 by matrix G 2 148. The output to these two multiplication operations are added in adders 150,152,154,156 and then output on antennas 158,160,162,164. It should be readily apparent how similar the structure can be created for each of the other available formats described above.
  • The above described BLAST vector and weighted transmission configurations are generally applicable for closed loop MIMO systems with 2, 3 and 4 antennas. It should be readily apparent how these can be extended to handle a larger number of antennas.
  • In a multi-carrier environment, these transmission configurations can be applied either on a per-carrier basis, for blocks of contiguous carriers, sets of non- or partially-contiguous carriers, or for an entire transmit bandwidth. Thus, for the OFDM particular implementations, in some implementations, a different beam-forming matrix/user assignment can be applied on a per-carrier basis; in other implementations, the available OFDM bandwidth is divided into sub-bands, and the same beam-forming matrix/user assignment is used on each sub-band; and yet a further available option, the entire OFDM bandwidth is used to transmit with the same beam-forming configuration. In yet another option, the entire available OFDM bandwidth divided into small sub-channels, with each user being assigned a respective set of such sub-channels.
  • Spatial Multiplexing when there are More Transmit Antennas than Receive Antennas
  • When there are extra transmit antennas, antenna selection and signal pre-processing can be used to significantly enhance link level performances. The SNR relation is: where γppas>>γfa, where γpp, γas, and γfa are the SNRs of pre-processing, antenna selection, and fixed antenna configuration (using M fixed transmit antennas from a pool of N). The gain of signal pre-processing over antenna selection is mainly from the use of beam-forming. Details of how feedback can be performed for beam-forming are given below. The gain of antenna selection over fixed antenna configuration is from two areas: diversity gain and average SNR gain (over STC). Preferably, the water-filling principle (the principle of using the most energy where conditions are the best) is applied to both antenna selection and beam-forming, Antenna selection is the most simple and effective way to achieve diversity and SNR gain.
  • Antenna Selection for Spatial Multiplexing
  • With antenna selection, the receiver analyzes conditions on the channel and selects antennas that are best for that receiver. This antenna selection information is then fed back to the transmitter for use in performing the actual transmissions.
  • Antenna Selection for a Single User With Single Antenna
  • A single stream selective transmit diversity technique is represented in Table 7 below. This example assumes that there are four transmit antennas available to be selected for a single receive antenna user. The four different transmit options are shown in the table to include: the user's symbol s1 being transmitted either using the first transmit antenna Tx1, or the second, third or fourth transmit antenna similarly labelled. In order for the transmitter to know which antenna to use, preferably a feedback signal from the receiver is employed. In the particular example shown, a two bit feedback signal is shown in the first column that can be used to identify one of four different possible transmit antennas. Other formats for the feedback information can be employed. When a single antenna is used, there is no spatial multiplexing.
  • Once again for a multi-carrier implementation, antenna selection can take place to any appropriate sub-carrier resolution. The particular feedback signalling is one particular example of how to signal back an identity of one of four antennas. An appropriate signalling mechanism can be employed. Furthermore, the antenna selection mechanism can be extended to differing numbers of transmit antennas.
    TABLE 7
    SISO selective transmit diversity
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    b0b1 = 00 Time t s 1 0 0 0
    b0b1 = 01 Time t 0 s 1 0 0
    b0b1 = 10 Time t 0 0 s1 0
    b0b1 = 11 Time t 0 0 0 s1

    2-Stream Spatial Multiplexing for Single User
  • An embodiment of the intention proposes closed loop sub-MIMO selection for SM. The term “sub-MIMO” is used to describe the case where there are multiple transmit antennas and a fewer number of receive antennas, and antenna selection is used to select a subset of the transmit antennas for use by the given receiver with the remaining antennas being available for other receivers. This will be described in the context of a 4×2 sub-MIMO system, in which the channel matrix to a given receiver has the following format: H = [ h 11 h 12 h 13 h 14 h 21 h 22 h 23 h 24 ] .
    Selecting two of the four antennas results in a smaller 2×2 channel matrix for the given receiver. There are six different possible channel matrices depending upon which of the two of the four transmit antennas are selected. The six possible channel matrices are as follows: H 12 = [ h 11 h 12 h 21 h 22 ] H 13 = [ h 11 h 13 h 21 h 23 ] H 23 = [ h 12 h 13 h 22 h 23 ] H 14 = [ h 11 h 14 h 21 h 24 ] H 24 = [ h 12 h 14 h 22 h 24 ] H 34 = [ h 13 h 14 h 23 h 24 ]
    These six potential channel matrices can then be analyzed to determine which sub-MIMO channel is best, i.e., which of the two four transmit antennas are best for the particular user. Any appropriate way of selecting the two antennas can be implemented. In the particular example that follows, antenna selection is performed on the basis of determinants calculated for the different channel matrices. The particular pair of antennas that is best for a given receiver is determined by selecting the sub-system Hij that satisfies
    |det(H ij)|=max{|det(H 12)|,|det(H 13)|,|det(H 23)|,|det(H 14)|,|det(H 24)|,|det(H 34)|}.
    This is depicted in FIG. 8 where a transmitter has four transmit antennas 190, and a receiver has two receive antennas 192. The determinant method is employed to select two of the four transmit antennas 190 for transmitting to the receiver.
  • More generally, in a K receive antenna system, K columns from channel matrix II can be selected, where K is the size of the subset antenna group. There are a total of CK M choices. For each possible selection, calculate det(H′H). Finally, select the antenna group with max(det(H′H)).
  • As in previous discussions, for multi-carrier applications, antenna selection can be used at whatever frequency resolution may be determined for a given application. The best antenna group may differ for different sub-carriers. If no other users are simultaneously being transmitted to, null sub-carriers are preferably fed into non-selected antennas. This antenna selection process is typically performed at the receiver. Once the best two transmit antennas have been selected at the receiver, the selection is fed back to the transmitter. An example of how this feedback can be performed is shown in Table 8 below. The transmit contents that are possible are shown for each of the four transmit antennas. It can be seen that there are six different permutations depending upon which two transmit antennas are selected. The first column is used to show how three bits can be used to transmit a selection of two of the six antennas. Other feedback formats are possible. In some implementations feed back is for every sub-carrier. If three bits are fed back on a per sub-carrier basis, then for L sub-carriers, L×3 bits would be required, in some implementations, feed back is for a sub-channel of contiguous sub-carriers. If three bits are fed back for a contiguous block of sub-carriers, under the assumption that channel conditions are substantially constant across the block, obviously fewer feedback bits are required.
    TABLE 8
    2-Layer SM with Beam-forming with antenna selection
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    b0b1b2 = 000 Time t w1s1 w2s2 0 0
    b0b1b2 = 001 Time t w1s1 0 w2s2 0
    b0b1b2 = 010 Time t 0 w1s1 w2s2 0
    b0b1b2 = 011 Time t w1s1 0 0 w2s2
    b0b1b2 = 100 Time t 0 w1s1 0 w2s2
    b0b1b2 = 101 Time t 0 0 w1s1 w2s2
  • In this case, the sub-MIMO channel selection is based on the sub-MIMO channel condition and the antenna power allocation for the SM data can be adjusted by the feedback information pertaining to the weights.
  • Antenna group index (illustratively 3 bits), and proportional weighting vector (illustratively 2 real elements (or alternatively complex elements), each element being of 4-bits, 6-bits, or 8-bits) are preferably provided as feedback, signals. It should be appreciated, however, that weights may be derived from feedback information and need not necessarily be directly provided in feedback information.
  • Closed Loop Sub-MIMO Selection with Beam-Forming
  • For a DL 4×2 MIMO system, consider six sub-MIMO systems H1,2, H1,3, M1,4, H2,3, H2,4, and H3,4. Assuming that Hij, Hik and Hil are the sub-MIMO systems that satisfy:
    |det(H ij)|+|det(H ik)|+|det(H il)|=max{|det(H li)|+|det(H lk)|+|det(H ll)|,|det(H lj)|+|det(H jk)|+|det(H jl)|}
    then by beam-forming with the jth and kth columns of H, and setting the weights to w j = det * ( H ij ) det * ( H il ) 2 + det * ( H ik ) 2 + det * ( H il ) 2 w k = det * ( H ik ) det * ( H il ) 2 + det * ( H ik ) 2 + det * ( H il ) 2 w l = det * ( H il ) det * ( H il ) 2 + det * ( H ik ) 2 + det * ( H il ) 2
    respectively, where the particular selection of the three determinants maximizes the denominator in the above-weight calculation we have
    det(H ij (jkl))=√{square root over (|det*(Hij)|2+|det*(Hlk)|2+|det*(Hil)|2)}.
  • Table 9 is an illustrative example of this. A single antenna is used to transmit a stream without any weighting; another antenna is used to transmit the same stream with weighting; and the remaining two antennas are used to transmit the other second stream, both with weighting. The particular antenna used to transmit either the un-weighted symbol or the weighted symbols is information that is preferably fed back to the transmitter. The weighting vector or information from which the weights can be derived is also preferably fed back from the receiver to the transmitter. Thus, the illustrated example, this would require the equivalent of three bits to identify one of the six permutations, and additional feedback for the three weights w1, w2 and w3. This format is a hybrid of beam-forming and spatial multiplexing. In this example, there are two data streams mapped onto four antennas. Each symbol is transmitted on two different antennas with the weights as shown in the table below. Antenna selection is performed to select which antennas go together to transmit the same symbol, and beam forming is used to apply weights to three of the four antennas. Four weights could be applied alternatively. It should be readily apparent how this concept can be extended to handle larger numbers of antennas overall and/or larger numbers of antennas per stream and/or larger numbers of streams. This approach will be referred to as K-layer SM employing more than K transmit antennas. In the example, we have 2-layer SM with four transmit antennas,
    TABLE 9
    2-Layer SM with antenna selection and beam-forming
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    b0b1b2 = 000 Time t s1 w1s2 w2s1 w3s2
    b0b1b2 = 001 Time t s1 w2s1 w1s2 w3s2
    b0b1b2 = 010 Time t s1 w1s1 w2s2 w3s2
    b0b1b2 = 011 Time t w3s2 s1 w1s2 w2s1
    b0b1b2 = 100 Time t w3s2 s1 w2s1 w1s2
    b0b1b2 = 101 Time t w3s2 w2s1 s1 w1s2

    STTD Transmission Formats
  • The transmission formats described thus far have all been based on the BLAST approach in which there is a single transmitted symbol for each information symbol, or on the BLAST variant described by way of example with reference to Table 9 above in which each K-stream blast is employed on more than K antennas, so at least some of the symbols are transmitted twice. Additional transmission formats are based on STTD (space time transmit diversity) in which there are at least two transmitted symbols based on each information symbol, and typically sets of two information symbols are transmitted using 2×2 Alamouti block. However, other STTD formats are also contemplated.
  • Single Stream Weighted STTD (SSTD) for a Single User with Antenna Selection and Proportional Weighting
  • In another transmission format, for a single data steam, transmit diversity is “proportionally weighted” STTD. This is a middle approach between conventional STTD (no weighting) and antenna switching. One advantage of this scheme is to safeguard against possible feedback error, feedback delay, and possible channel change between feedback updates for the antenna selection. The channel matrix condition (CMC) does not affect STTD when orthogonal codes are used. For quasi-orthogonal codes, CMC does affect signal quality.
  • In the case of single stream transmit diversity, we also have the two options of beam-forming and antenna selection that can be performed similarly to that described above for the BLAST transmission formats. Beam-forming involves applying weights to the elements of the STTD groups, and antenna selection involves selecting a sub-set of a set of available transmit antennas for transmitting the stream.
  • For an SSTD system with four transmit antennas, a hybrid proportionally weighted STTD approach can be used. In one embodiment, the two antennas with the strongest combined SNR are selected, and proportional weighting on these two selected antennas is then applied. The advantages of this scheme include; diversity and SNR gain due to antenna selection, increased robustness provided by proportional weighting, and the employment of efficient Alamouti codes. An example of SSTD with antenna selection and proportional weighting is given in Table 10, where two antennas out of four are selected and weighted,
    TABLE 10
    SSTD with antenna selection and proportional weighting
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    b0b1b2 = 000 Time t w1s1 w2s2 0 0
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* w2s1* 0 0
    b0b1b2 = 001 Time t w1s1 0 w2s2 0
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* 0 w2s1* 0
    b0b1b2 = 010 Time t 0 w1s1 w2s2 0
    Time (t + T) 0 −w1s2* w2s1* 0
    b0b1b2 = 011 Time t w1s1 0 0 w2s2
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* 0 0 w2s1*
    b0b1b2 = 100 Time t 0 w1s1 0 w2s2
    Time (t + T) 0 −w1s2* 0 w2s1*
    b0b1b2 = 101 Time t 0 0 w1s1 w2s2
    Time (t + T) 0 0 −w1s2* w2s1*
  • In this case, feedback signals preferably include antenna group index (illustratively 3 bits), proportional weighting vector or other information allowing the determination of the weighting vector (illustratively 2 real elements, each element might for example be of 4-bits, 6-bits, or 8-bits). It should be readily apparent how the single stream case can be extended to larger numbers of transmit antennas.
  • Double Stream Transmit Diversity (D-STTD) for a Single User
  • With double stream transmit diversity, two streams are transmitted to a single user with each stream being sent using a respective weighted Alamouti code structure (or some other STTD structure). More generally, with an M transmit antenna system, M/2 STTD sub-groups can be formed and transmitted to a different receiver, although multiple or all of the sub-groups might be sent to one receiver. This is a hybrid case of STTD and space-multiplexing (SM). Because of inter-code interference, antenna grouping becomes more important. Preferably, layer based water-filling is employed to provide additional gain to the system. With layer-based water-filling, more power is transmitted to the layer having the better channel. Thus, with a double STTD system, a respective pair of antennas is assigned to each stream, and the respective “layer” is transmitted on that pair of antennas. Preferably, more power is given to the layer having the better channel conditions.
  • An example of a set of possible layer weighting permutations is shown in Table 11 for the four transmit antenna case. In the first row, transmit antennas 1 and 2 are grouped together, and antenna 3 and 4 are grouped together, to form two constituent STTD codes that can be assigned to respective receivers or to a single receiver. In the example of Table 11 below, symbols s1 and s2 are of one layer, while symbols s3 and s4 are of a second layer.
    TABLE 11
    Double STTD with layer weighting
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    b0b1 = 00 Time t w1s1 w1s2 w2s3 w2s4
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* w1s1* −w2s4* w2s3*
    b0b1 = 01 Time t w1s1 w2s3 w1s2 w2s4
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* −w2s4* w1s1* w2s3*
    b0b1 = 10 Time t w1s1 w2s3 w2s4 w1s2
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* −w2s4* w2s3* w1s1*
  • The feedback signals in this case are used to select one of the three different permutations, and this can take the form of an antenna group index (2 bits in the example shown), and weights or information relating to weights. In this implementation, there are two STTD water-filling weights and each can be fed back to an implementation specific resolution, for example, 4-bits, 6-bits, or 8-bits. The water-filling weights determine the relative amount of power used on the two STTD groups.
  • In summary, the options for STTD transmissions for a single user include a pair of antennas to transmit a single layer, or multiple pairs of transmit antennas each used to transmit a respective layer, in each of these cases each layer being transmitted using STTD. Preferably, for multi-carrier applications, antenna selection/grouping is performed on a per sub-carrier basis. Alternatively, it can be performed for some other sub-carrier breakdown. In the event an entire OFDM band, this would be referred to as “fixed” STTD, while in the event of antenna grouping on a per sub-carrier basis, this is referred to as antenna grouping D-STTD, FIG. 9 shows a comparison of the performance of fixed D-STTD and antenna grouping D-STTD for an OFDM system. It can be seen that over a range of sub-carriers, the fixed D-STTD will perform similarly to the antenna grouping D-STTD on sub-carriers where the particular fixed antennas perform the best. Elsewhere, the antenna grouping D-STTD will perform better. In the example of FIG. 9, on a per sub-carrier basis, an antenna grouping has been performed. The feedback required for this implementation would be two bits per sub-carrier to choose the antennas. Preferably, weights are also fed back if there is available bandwidth for this.
  • In addition to antenna grouping, antenna selection can also be used to eliminate some of the antennas and only use a single antenna per STTD block. This will make a 4×2 double STTD system degenerate to a 2×2 BLAST system. In fact, this can be viewed as applying antenna selection to each STTD sub-code—after the rule of antenna grouping has been applied.
  • For example, if antenna selection is also used with the W-STTD format in the second row of Table 11 to eliminate the first and fourth transmit antennas, the result is something that is effectively equivalent to a 2×2 BLAST system as shown in Table 12 below.
    TABLE 12
    Weighted BLAST degenerated from double STTD
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    Time t 0 w2s3 w1s2 0
    Time (t + T) 0 −w2s4* w1s1* 0
  • In another embodiment, proportional weighting is applied to each constituent STTD code after antenna grouping, rather than or in addition to for the STTD codes as a whole as was the case in Table 11 above. An example of weighted double STTD with antenna grouping and proportional weighting is given in Table 13 below. There are two levels of weighting in this design: water-filling is applied across layers (i.e. across constituent STTD codes), and proportional weighting is applied within each constituent STTD code. In other words, weighting is sued to get the best allocation of the Alamouti pairs among the antennas, and weighting is used to weight the antennas of a given pair differently. In the table below, both of these weights are included within the single weight wi applied to each symbol. In the example below, antennas 1 and 3 have been grouped to form a first STTD group, and antennas 2 and 4 have been grouped to form a second STTD group.
    TABLE 13
    Weighted double STTD with antenna grouping and
    proportional weighting of each element
    Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4
    Time t w1s1 w2s3 w3s2 w4s4
    Time (t + T) −w1s2* −w2s4* w3s1* w4s3*
  • Referring now to FIG. 10, shown is a very specific example of how any of the above described transmission formats can be allocated to a pair of users occupying an OFDM band. In this case, there are four transmit antennas 170,172,174,176, and there are two receivers indicated at 178 and 180. Each receiver has a respective pair of receive antennas. With the particular example shown, antenna selection is used to select the first and fourth antennas 170,176 for transmitting to a second receiver 180 and to select the second and third antennas 172,174 for transmission to the first receiver 178. Furthermore, the OFDM sub-carriers that are allocated to the two receivers are indicated at 182 for the first receiver and 184 for the second receiver. It can be seen that for this example, the sub-carriers are allocated in a non-overlapping fashion such that a different set of sub-carriers are transmitted to each of the two receivers 178,180. In this example, the sub-carriers are allocated to antennas in groups of six. However, more generally, sub-carrier allocation to particular antennas, and antenna assignment to particular users can be performed on a per sub-carrier basis, or to any other desired resolution.
  • Only a subset of antennas/sub-channels are selected for transmitting signals to a given receiver. Receivers only need to feedback antennas/sub-channels group indexes to the transmitter. In the event weighting is also employed, then this case, weighting information might be fed back for each sub-carrier, or for groups of six sub-carriers.
  • In multi-user applications, antenna/sub-channel selection is based on multi-user diversity; different users may select different antenna groups. Quasi-water-filling over is preferably employed in selecting antennas/sub-channels: transmitting power on good channels and antennas, while avoiding poor channels. Power balancing can be achieved through multi-user diversity. Since different receivers experience different channel environments, their antenna group selection will not necessarily the same. When different receivers select different antenna groups, the average power transmitted by each transmit antenna can be somewhat balanced.
  • Antenna Selection for STTD Formats and SM Formats
  • The above STTD and SM options have all featured weighting, either in the form of water-filling across different STTD groups/SM antennas and/or proportional weighting within STTD groups. Antenna selection/antenna grouping can be combined with these weighting options. In another embodiment, antenna selection/antenna grouping alone is employed. Several examples of pure antenna selection will now be described.
  • Antenna Selection/Grouping for three Transmit Antennas
  • Example STTD formats for three transmit antenna applications will now be described. In the example of FIG. 11, each 4×3 matrix has three rows and each row is transmitted on a respective transmit antenna. In the first example matrix A1, the first two symbols s1, s2 are transmitted using STC coding on the first two antennas and during two transmit intervals, and the next two symbols s3, s4 are transmitted using space time coding on the first and third antennas during the next two transmit intervals. The matrices A2 and A3 show other permutations for selecting two of the antennas for each STC block. The matrices A1, A2 and A3 are single stream transmission matrices. During four transmission intervals, four symbols s1, s2, s3, s4 are transmitted.
  • Another antenna grouping example is shown in FIG. 11 for matrices B1, B2, B3. This is a two stream example. It can be seen that one of the streams consists of s1, s2, s3, s4 transmitted over the four transmission intervals, and the other stream consists of symbols s5, s6, s7, s8 transmitted over the four symbol transmission intervals. In this case, space time coding is applied for both streams, but diversity is applied for one of the streams but not for the other. The three matrices B1, B2, B3 show different ways of assigning the antennas to the various streams.
  • FIG. 12 shows examples of antenna groupings and antenna selections for closed loop STC/MIMO 3-transmit antenna arrangements. Also shown in FIG. 12 is a set of examples of antennas selection feedback for a three antenna system. For a single stream application, the receiver simply selects one of three antennas, and feeds back an identification of the selected antenna. Thus, C1 represents the selection of the first antenna, C2 represents the selection of the second antenna, and C3 represents the selection of the third antenna. The transmission matrix also shows a term “c” which represents the amount of power boosting that can be implemented. In this case, such a single antenna is used for the particular user, the entire power for that user can be applied to that single antenna and no power boosting need be employed. An example of CQICH bits that might be fed back to identify one of the three permutations is also shown.
  • Also shown is a two stream example where the receiver must select two of the three possible antennas, and feedback to the transmitter which two of the three antennas it would like to receive its data on. In this case, a power boosting factor of 1/√{square root over (2)} such that the total amount of power is divided across the two antennas for the given user.
  • Antenna Selection/Grouping for Four Transmit Antennas
  • FIG. 13 shows a set of example antenna groupings for 4-transmit closed loop STC/MIMO. Shown are examples for one stream, two streams and four streams. The possible matrices for one stream are indicated at A1, A2, A3. In each of these examples, a stream consisting of s1, s2, s3, s4 is transmitted using all four antennas, with space time coding being applied between s1 and s2, on two antennas and between s3, and s4 over two antennas. The three different antenna groupings represent different selections of antennas for the two STC groups.
  • With the two stream example, the matrices B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6 show how two streams consisting of s1, s2, s3, s4 and s5, s6, s7, s8 can be spread across four transmit antennas in six different ways. Space time coding is again employed between sets of two symbols within each stream.
  • FIG. 14 shows antenna selection options for a closed loop STC/MIMO 4-transmit antenna arrangement in accordance with an embodiment of the invention. Shown are 1, 2 and 3 stream antenna selection options. With one stream antenna selection option, a single of the four antenna as selection for transmitting a single symbol. The transmission matrices are indicated at C1, C2, C3, C4. A power boosting of c=1 is applied since only a single transmit antenna is employed.
  • For two streams, two of the four antennas are selected, and there are six different options as set out in the table. A power boosting factor of 1/√{square root over (2)} is applied for this case. For a three stream example, there are four different ways to select three of the four antennas as set out in the table. A power boosting factor of 1/√{square root over (3)} is applied. Also shown in the table is an example set of bits that can used to feedback on the channel quality indicator channel selection of an appropriate one of the potential transmission matrices depending upon whether there are 1, 2 or 3 streams.
  • Binary Beam-Forming
  • It is noted that while the above examples show antenna selection feedback, binary beam-forming can be used to similar effect. With binary beam-forming, the beam-forming weights are binary, meaning that a given antenna is either on or off. This is analogous to selection. Two specific examples of using beam-forming to perform antenna selection are provided in FIGS. 15 and 16 for three and four antenna systems respectively. For the four antenna system, assuming the symbol stream can be defined in the form of x=diag[s1, s2, s3, s4] and the transmitted beam-formed matrix is C=xW where is listed in FIG. 16. This is the same result as the antenna selection examples of FIG. 14. This allows the unification of antenna selection with beam-forming, where W consists of binary weights in this particular case.
  • MIMO Downlink Pilot Designs
  • Referring now to FIGS. 17 through 23, a number of different pilot transmission schemes will now be described for MIMO applications of OFDM. In these examples, it is assumed that a common pilot structure is used for any receivers that might need to rely on it. In order that multiple receivers can make use of the pilots, no receiver specific pre-coding is performed. In other examples described further below, pre-coding of pilots for specific receivers is performed. In all of the Figures showing pilot transmission schemes, the horizontal axis represents OFDM sub-carriers separated in frequency, and the vertical axis is the time dimension, with each row representing on OFDM symbol transmission interval. In all of the examples, the receiver recovers the transmitted pilots, compares them to known content of the pilots, and determines channel estimates on the basis of this comparison. Channel estimates can be interpolated for the non-pilot sub-carrier locations.
  • Referring first to FIG. 17, shown is a pilot transmission scheme in which pilots are allocated for four antennas as indicated at 400,402,406,408. The pilots are allocated in blocks of 2×2 sub-carrier locations, with two consecutive sub-carriers over two consecutive OFDM symbols. In this example, the location of the pilot for each antenna is the same with each group of four sub-carrier locations. Furthermore, note that the pilots 406,408 for antennas 1 and 3 are “punctured pilots”, meaning that these pilots are transmitted in place of data sub-carriers such that the receiver must rely on error correction to demodulate and recover correctly the transmitted information in the absence of the punctured data locations. In other words, where in a 2-antenna system, data would be transmitted on sub-carriers indicated at 409, with the 4-antenna system no data is transmitted on the sub-carrier locations used for the punctured pilot locations. Each pilot is transmitted only by the respective antenna with null sub-carriers inserted in the other antennas. In the illustrated example, pilots are inserted in every pair of two consecutive OFDM symbols, but in some implementations, not every OFDM symbol contains pilots. The location of the 2×2 blocks of pilots is staggered between adjacent pairs of OFDM symbols. In the illustrated example, the staggering is not uniform, but it could be uniform in other implementations.
  • Referring now to FIG. 18, another example of a 4-antenna pilot transmission scheme is shown. In this example, four pilots are inserted on a single sub-carrier for the four antennas as shown in 410,412,414,416 over four OFDM symbol transmission intervals. Multiple such groups of four pilots are inserted in sub-carrier locations that are separated by eight data sub-carriers in the example shown. Furthermore, the particular sub-carriers used are offset in consecutive sets of four OFDM symbols. It can be seen that half as many pilots are inserted with the example of FIG. 18 as are inserted in the example of FIG. 17. The result is that for a given sub-carrier and a given antenna, an accurate channel estimate can be obtained at the receiver half as often. The interpolated channel estimates may therefore be less accurate. This has the potential of effecting the accuracy of data recovery at the receiver.
  • While a particular staggering arrangement has been shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, it is to be understood that other arrangements are possible.
  • Referring now to FIG. 19, shown is another example of a pilot transmission scheme for a 4-antenna system. In this system, for groups of four consecutive OFDM symbols, pilots are inserted only for two of the antennas. The group of four OFDM symbols indicated at 420, pilots are inserted for antennas 0 and 1, while for the group of four OFDM symbols 422 pilots are inserted for antennas 1 and 3. For subsequent groups, the set of antennas alternates. Within a given set, pilot pairs are inserted in selected OFDM sub-carrier locations over two OFDM symbols. For example, one such pair of pilot symbols is indicated at 424,426, this including one pilot for antenna 0 and one pilot for antenna 2. The sub-carriers used for the pilots are offset between the first two OFDM symbols and the second OFDM symbols of the set of four OFDM symbols 420. A similar arrangement is shown for the pilots of antennas 1 and 3 during the second set of four OFDM symbols 422. While a particular offsetting arrangement has been shown, other offsetting arrangements can be implemented.
  • Referring now to FIG. 20, shown is an example of a pilot transmission scheme for an 8-antenna system. Groups of eight pilots are inserted in a staggered fashion within the time frequency plane. Each group is two sub-carriers by four OFDM symbols, and includes one pilot for each of the eight antennas. One such group of eight is indicated at 430.
  • Referring now to FIG. 21, shown is another example of pilot transmission scheme for an 8-antenna system. In this example, alternating sets of four OFDM symbols are used to transmit pilots for respective sets of four antennas. Thus, the first set of four OFDM symbols 440 is used for the first four antennas and the next set of four OFDM symbols 442 is used for the next set of four antennas. For each set of four antennas, the pilots are inserted in blocks of two sub-carriers by two OFDM symbols each containing one pilot for each of the four antennas, and the location of the block is offset between consecutive pairs of OFDM symbols.
  • Referring now to FIG. 22, shown is a pilot transmission scheme for a 12-antenna system. This example is basically an extension of the example of FIG. 20 but with each group of pilots being inserted having a dimension of two OFDM sub-carriers by six OFDM symbols, and each block of OFDM pilots containing one pilot for each of 12 different antennas. One example block is indicated at 450.
  • Referring now to FIG. 23, shown is another example of a pilot transmission scheme for a 12-antenna system. In this case, the overall pilot pattern is 12 OFDM symbols in duration. The first four OFDM symbols 452 are used for first four antennas; the next four OFDM symbols 454 are used for the next four antennas, and the last four OFDM symbols 456 are used for the last four antennas. Each set of four OFDM symbols is shown arranged similarly to the sets of four OFDM symbols described previously with reference to FIG. 28 for the eight antenna design.
  • As indicated above, for the example pilot patterns of FIGS. 17 through 23, as described, the pilots are not pre-coded, and can therefore be used by any receiver to obtain channel estimations for the particular antenna. In another embodiment, for any one of the patterns described thus far, the pilots for at least one antenna are pre-coded for a particular user. As described above, pre-coding of pilots for a particular user may enable pilots to be inserted at a lower frequency or for the particular user and thereby save transmission bandwidth. Further examples are given below that involve pre-coding of pilots for closed-loop MIMO sub-channel transmissions.
  • Pilot Transmission Schemes with Pilot Pre-Coding
  • Systems and methods employing pre-coding of MIMO pilots in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described. In the above described embodiments, it has been assumed that pilot channel information is transmitted without any weights being applied. In this manner, any receiver can look at the transmitted pilot information and recover a respective channel for the particular receiver. In some embodiments, a pre-coding of the pilot is performed.
  • For a pre-coded pilot, the equivalent channel measured at the receiver becomes G=HW, where H is the actual channel, and W are the weights applied to the pilots. The feedback beam-former W, or information from which it can be derived, may be computed from the channel H for a particular user, Many examples of how this feedback can be performed are detailed below.
  • In the event pre-coding of the pilot is performed, the channel can be recovered according to:
    H=GW′(WW′)−1
    However, the pilots need to be user-specific for such a case because beam-forming weights are receiver-specific. This is in contrast to the case where the pilots are not pre-coded and the channel can be recovered by each user.
  • FIGS. 24 and 25 compare and contrast the use of non-pre-coded pilots as opposed to pre-coded pilots. In FIG. 24, it is assumed that a set of non-pre-coded pilots were transmitted. A distribution of data sub-carrier locations 451 and pilot sub-carrier locations 453 are shown for the purpose of example only, In this case, the channel H can be used for:
  • 1. current H analysis and future feedback; and
  • 2. multiple users (possibly including non-MIMO) to assist in channel interpolation.
  • The non-pre-coded channel H can be re-encoded to coherently demodulate current data for each user.
  • In contrast, with the example of FIG. 25, some of the pilots are dedicated to a particular user, and as such can be pre-coded while other pilots are for multiple use, and as such are not pre-coded. The use of pre-coding for pilots can be constant, or can vary over different time. A distribution of data sub-carrier locations 451 and pilot sub-carrier locations 453 are shown for the purpose of example only. During time t1, the pilot sub-carriers 461 are pre-coded pilots for a first receiver 465, and during a second time t2, pre-coded pilots are inserted for a different receiver 467. There may also be pilots that are transmitted for use by both users (not shown).
  • Advantageously, by using pre-coded pilots, a smaller number of pilots can be used. The number of pilots can be reduced in either the time or frequency dimension. Preferably, for cases in which the receiver is mobile, the density in time is kept the same and the density is reduced in the frequency domain. Furthermore, for band adaptive modulation and coding, it is preferable to select the most flat part of the band or use larger FFT size, and/or to use an interlaced antenna pilot mapping.
  • For the case where a receiver is nomadic, i.e., it is not highly mobile, but does move periodically, it is advantageous to keep the frequency density the same, and to reduce the density in the time domain. In this case, preferably a block antenna pilot mapping is employed.
  • The location of the receiver-specific pilots is an implementation specific decision. For the purpose of completeness, several examples are presented below.
  • FIG. 26 shows an example of pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna basestation (BS) in accordance with an embodiment of the invention. In this examples sub-channels are defined that are nine sub-carriers wide for a given receiver, each sub-channel being assigned to a respective receiver. Thus, two sub-channels are indicated at 500,502. These sub-channels can be continuously allocated for a given mobile station, or they can be allocated in a time division manner. Pilot carriers are inserted as indicated at 504,506 for antenna 0 and antenna 1 respectively and for the first mobile station. These are inserted in the sub-channel 500 for the first mobile station. Similarly, pilot carriers 508,510 are inserted in the sub-channel for the second receiver for antenna 0 and antenna 1 respectively. Because the pilot sub-carriers are dedicated to a particular receiver, preferably they are pre-coded as discussed above. Pre-coded pilot sub-carriers axe coded for the particular receiver using feedback information received from each receiver.
  • The example of FIG. 26 shows sub-channels that consist of a set of sub-carriers being allocated to respective mobile stations. This approach can be extended to multiple sub-channels, more than simply the two shown. Furthermore, the particular location of the sub-carriers used for pilots can vary on an implementation specific basis. Preferably the pilots are somewhat scattered within each sub-channel for a given receiver so that better channel information can be interpolated for the remaining data sub-carrier locations.
  • Referring now to FIG. 27, shown is another example in which sub-channels are divided up in a time-wise manner. The sub-channel for a first mobile station is transmitted on the first two OFDM symbols as indicated at 520, and the sub-channel for a second mobile station is transmitted on the second set of two OFDM symbols as indicated at 522, and then this pattern repeats. The sub-channel for a given mobile station may contain fewer or greater number of OFDM symbols than the two shown in FIG. 27. Furthermore, there can be any appropriate number of sub-channels defined. In this example, receiver specific pilot carriers are inserted during each of the two sub-channels 520,522. The pilots for the first sub-channel are indicated at 524,526 and the pilot carriers for the second receiver are indicated at 528,530. In this example, the pilots for antenna 0 are inserted in one OFDM symbol, and the pilots for antenna 1 are inserted in the next OFDM symbol within each sub-channel. A particular spacing for the pilot carriers is shown, but of course different spacings and frequencies can alternatively be employed. Once again, since the pilots are dedicated to a particular users they can be pre-coded for each user.
  • The example of FIG. 26 can be extended to differing numbers of antennas. An example is shown in FIG. 28 where there are three antennas and as such each sub-channel has pilot carriers for each of the three antennas. With the example of FIG. 28, the pilots for one of the antennas, in the illustrated example antenna 1, are punctured pilot carriers. This means that data locations would normally have been transmitted there, and as such the receiver must rely on error correction to correctly recover an entire transmitted data stream. Alternatively, pilot locations could be allocated for all three antennas that do no rely on puncturing. Furthermore, it may be that only some of the pilots for a given antenna are puncture locations. A very similar example is shown in FIG. 29 for a four transmit antenna example in which the pilot carriers for two of the antennas, namely antennas 1 and 3 are punctured pilot carriers. In this example and the other examples, zero, one, or multiple pilots may rely on puncturing.
  • In accordance with another embodiment of the invention a pre-coded pilot design for the PUSC (partial use sub-carrier applications) is provided. For PUSC the symbol is first divided into basic clusters of consecutive sub-carriers. Pilots and data carriers are allocated within each cluster of sub-carriers. According to IEEE 802.16-2004, a permutation is used when allocating the data carriers to a sub-channel, a permutation consisting of a remapping of the a cluster sub-carriers into other allocations (that can be almost random). The data carriers in each cluster may be assigned to different MSSs, and therefore, pilots may be used by multiple MSSs. To support the dedicated pilots to closed-loop MSSs operating in PUSC mode, the permutation procedure to partition the sub-carriers into sub-channels is disabled or is allowed to apply to the PUSC sub-channel within a single user. Each sub-channel includes 48 data carriers from two clusters.
  • FIG. 30 shows a pre-coded pilot design for a 2-antenna BS for a PUSC zone in accordance with an embodiment of the invention, where the pilot design shows the form of the cluster prior to remapping/permutation. In other words, the pattern of FIG. 30 would actually be scrambled across an OFDM bandwidth. In this example, the first four OFDM symbols are used for a sub-channel for a first mobile station, and the next four OFDM symbols 542 form a sub-channel for another mobile station. In the frequency domain, there may be additional sub-channels for other mobile stations, not shown, or the entire bandwidth may be applied for a single wireless station at a time. In this case, pilots are inserted for two antennas, and these can be inserted in a receiver specific manner. Pilot carriers for the first receiver on antenna 0 are indicated at 544, and pilot carriers for the first receiver on the next antenna are indicated at 546. These are inserted in pairs on consecutive sub-carrier locations and in every other OFDM symbol at illustrated. The pattern continues with pilots carriers 545,547 inserted during the sub-channel 542 for the second receiver, and the pilots are pre-coded for the respective receivers.
  • Referring now to FIG. 31, shown is another example similar to that of FIG. 30, but in which pilot carriers are inserted for four antennas. In this case, the pilot carrier insertions for antenna 0 and 1 are identical to those of FIG. 30. In addition to this, pilots are inserted in the first OFDM symbol of each sub-channel for antennas 2 and 3 as indicated at 550,552. In this case, it is assumed that the pilots for antennas 2 and 3 are inserted in punctured pilot locations. Furthermore, the pilots are inserted half as frequently for the antennas 2 and 3, namely for only one OFDM symbol of each set of four.
  • Closed Loop Feedback Options for MIMO Applications
  • The transmission formats discussed above rely on antenna selection/grouping feed back and/or beam-forming weights. FIG. 32 shows a summary of available closed loop STC/MIMO arrangements with beam-former structures in accordance with embodiments of the invention.
  • The first option indicated at 600 is to perform MIMO/STC set up based on closed loop feedback. This may involve selection between SM and STTD, and/or antenna selection and/or antenna grouping, as defined for a given application. Given a set of options that are to be made available to a given receiver, the feedback information allows the receiver to select between the options and inform the transmitter of the selection.
  • The next option indicated at 602 is to perform beams forming based on feedback information. The feedback information may come in a variety of forms described in detail below. The information that is fed back allows a transmitter to generate weights for the particular receiver. The feedback information can be the weights per se, or other information.
  • The next option indicated at 604 involves performing MIMO/STC setup based on feedback and feeding the output of this into a beam-former that might be static in nature.
  • In another embodiment, indicated at 606, the output of a MIMO/STC matrix is input into a beam-former that undergoes beam-forming as a function of feedback.
  • Finally, the next option indicated at 608 involves performing MIMO/STC set up based on feedback, and feeding the output of this into a beam-former that also performing beam-forming a function of feedback.
  • In summary, the options are to apply feedback for MIMO/STC set up and/or applying feedback to the beam-former The beam-former feedback information may be for a unitary beam-former structure, or some other beam-former. Detailed examples have been given previously as to how MIMO/STC set up information can be fed back, Many options for beam-former feedback are given in the details below.
  • In accordance with various embodiments of the invention there is provided methods of facilitating closed loop MIMO pre-coding and feedback in a communications network that might, for example be operating in accordance with the IEEE 802.16(e) and IEEE 802.11(n) standards. As will be apparent to one of skill in the art the various embodiments can be implemented in software, firmware or an ASIC (application specific integrated circuit) or any suitable combination of these or other components.
  • Feedback for Antenna Selection/Grouping and Eigen-mode Selection
  • SVD Approach
  • SVD (singular value decomposition) is theoretically optimal in terms of the best channel matching transmission and achieving the link level Shannon capacity. However, SVD typically requires a large amount of computing and a large amount of CSI (channel state information) feedback in the FDD (frequency division duplexing) case. With SVD, the Channel matrix H is decomposed according to
    H=UΛV
    where U and V are unitary, and Λ is a diagonal matrix containing the eigenvalues. Typically, information defining V is fed back (although H could be fed back and the decomposition re-executed at the transmitter). Then the transmitter sends VTS, where S is the information vector. The receiver receives this, as modified by the channel, i.e.,
    Ŝ=HV T S=UΛVV T S(+noise).
    The receiver multiplies this by U1 (conjugate transpose of U, known at the receiver) to yield
    U1ΛVVS T′=ΛS
    due to the properties of unitary matrices. The diagonal matrix Λ is also known at the receiver and S can then be recovered. Various methods of efficiently feeding back V or information allowing the transmitter to reconstruct V are given below.
  • H can be further expressed as follows:
    H=λ 1 u 1 v 12 u 2 v 23 u 3 v 34 u 4 v 4
    the U matrix consists of columns equalling the vectors u1,u2,u3,u4 and the V matrix consists of rows equalling the vectors v1,v2,v3,v4 all the vectors being unitary.
  • Thus, the matrix VT used in the transmitter consists of a set of unitary vectors as columns, each associated with a respective eigenvalue. For example, a 4×4 matrix is [v1,v2,v3,v4] where v1,v2,v3,v4 are unitary vectors in columns of the matrix. Eigen-mode selection involves setting one or more of the vectors in V to zero, typically the vectors associated with the weak eigenvalue(s). In some embodiments, eigen-mode selection information is fed back to the receiver.
  • Antenna Selection/Grouping
  • Antenna selection/grouping is based on the selection of sub-set of antennae from a larger set of available antennas by the terminal based on a simple criterion. The terminal generally needs to feedback very little information to the base station, Mechanisms for transmitting this feedback information from the receiver to the transmitter have been presented above.
  • Antenna grouping criterion can be based on determinant as described previously, Antenna grouping can also be based on an eigenvalue approach. This approach may avoid selection being dominated by weak layers. Typically degradation due to antenna selection is smaller when the group size is larger.
  • For a MIMO system, the eigenvalues of the channel matrix are often unevenly distributed. Removing the layers associated with small eigenvalues will have little effects on channel capacity. With a reduced number of layers, more sophisticated MEMO decoders can be used to improve link performance. The power saved from layers that are not used for this a particular receiver can be used by other users on other sub-bands. C = 10 i = 1 M lg ( 1 + P M β l ) β l = σ 2 i = 1 M ( v ij 2 λ j ) C = 10 i = 1 M - 1 lg ( 1 + P M λ i σ 2 )
    This expression is for the channel capacity. It can be seen that larger lambdas make a larger contribution to the channel capacity. While a default would be to assign equal power to all eigenvalues, in another embodiment, water filling according to eigenvalue is performed, and/or some eigenvalues are not used at all.
  • The V matrix of an SVD decomposed channel matrix consists of a set of horizontal vectors each of which are multiplied by a respective eigenvalue in the product UDV. In the transmitter, through the use of a beamforming matrix VT a respective stream can be transmitted in association with each eigenvalue/column of VT=row of V. Thus, if VT=[v1,v2,v3,v4], then what is transmitted can be expressed as v1×s1+v2×s2+v3×s3×v4×s4 for a 4×4 system. Transmission using such a vector will be referred to as an “eigen-mode”. Different AMC can be applied in the transmitter for each such eigen-mode. For example, in a 4×4 system, there will be 4 eigenvalues, and four beamforming vectors each for use with a respective stream. In the event water filling is employed, the power allocated to the streams is not equal, and in some cases one or more of the layers is simply not used at all, and the power that would have been used for that stream is available for the other layers. Feedback in such systems can consist of an index of the eigen-modes to employ, with the remaining eigen-modes shutdown, and/or with channel quality readings for some or all of the selected eigen-modes. In some embodiments, the channel quality defines an associated AMC for use on the eigen-mode at the transmitter.
  • These two approaches are summarized in FIG. 33 for the SVD approach showing the discarding of weak eigen-modes, and FIG. 34 showing de-selected antennas turned off/not used for the particular user. The simulation results of FIGS. 35 and 36 show that antenna grouping can achieve very close to SVD performance with significantly lower complexity.
  • SVD generally provides optimal performance when adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) can be performed on each individual layer. When AMC is not layer based, the performance difference is generally smaller due to imbalanced layer SNR distribution. Preferably, therefore, AMC is implemented on per layer basis.
  • In some embodiments, when SVD is used the 4-th layer can generally be eliminated meaning only 3 columns of the V-matrix generally need to be fed back to the transmitter. In systems with larger numbers of antennas, it may be possible to eliminate more layers.
  • Antenna Grouping Algorithms
  • Various antenna grouping algorithms will now be described. Any of these can be employed on a per sub-carrier, per block of sub-carriers, per group of blocks of sub-carriers or for an entire OFDM band. They can be applied for a single or multiple user system.
  • Selection Between STTD and SM
  • An antenna grouping algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described. With channel estimates from the pilots: the receiver computes criterion for use in selecting between STTD and SM transmission modes as follows, where if the STTD criteria is greater than the SM criteria, then STTD transmission is employed and alternatively, SM is employed. Other criteria can be used. STTD SM i = 1 N j = 1 M h ij 2 > γ 0 M - 1 2 i = 1 M g i 2 where γ 0 = P M σ 2
    and gi is the row of matrix G, where G=(H′H)−1 H′, and H is the channel matrix. For a MISO arrangement the weights may be provided as follows: Beam - forming γ = 1 σ 2 i = 1 N h l 2 Antenna selection γ = 1 σ 2 max { h 1 2 , h 2 2 , , h N 2 } STTD γ = 1 N σ 2 i = 1 N h l 2
  • According to another embodiment one may exploit the benefits of both. For example, when a channel changes slowly, beam-forming provides a SNR gain, while STTD provides diversity gain (on the symbol level) which improves FEC performance (especially for higher code rates). Then, when a channel changes quickly one can degenerate to an STTD system which will preserve protection against fading.
  • Antenna Selection for STTD
  • An antenna grouping algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described for an STTD mode. The antenna group selection can be based on criterion including the following: SS STTD = arg max SS l = 1 N j = 1 M SS h ij 2
    Antenna Selection for SM
  • For the SM mode, the antenna group selection can be based on criterion including the following: SS V - BLAST = arg min SS l = 1 M SS g i 2
    Antenna Selection for STTD, SM, and Switching Criterion
  • An antenna grouping algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described. For the STTD mode, in accordance with an embodiment of the invention, define ξ j = l = 1 N h ij 2
    and select a set of antennas according to: L K = arg min j { M } ( ξ j )
    And wherein transmission on an antenna is stopped when:
    Ll<αLK
    In accordance with embodiment of the invention, for the SM mode, if Q = λ max λ min β
    then a new subset of antennas then can be selected according to criterion including maximum determinant criterion:
    S a=arg max(det(H a ′H a))
    where Ha is the channel matrix of the new sub-MIMO size, and α and β are predefined thresholds, and where λmax and λmin are the largest and smallest eigenvalues respectively.
  • The following is a particular example of an antenna grouping procedure:
  • Step 1: Decide antenna group size for STTD and SM mode;
  • Step 2: Select-transmit antenna sub-sets based on selected size;
  • Step 3: Decide transmit rode: STTD vs. SM;
  • Step 4: If SM is selected and the antenna group size is larger than SM layers, then use Matrix B, otherwise, use Matrix C.
  • Multi-User Pre-Coding
  • A multi-user pre-coding algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described. Consider a MIMO broadcast channel transmit antennas to transmit to K users each with N receive antennas. The base band model of this system is defined by:
    y k =H k s+w h 1≦k≦K
    where HkεCN×M denotes the channel matrix from the base station to the kth user, sεCM×1 represents the transmitted vector, and ykεCN×1 signifies received vector by the kth user. The vector wkεCN×1 is white Gaussian noise with zero-mean and unit-variance.
  • In the proposed methods the transmitted vector a carries information for M users, defined as follows. s = j = 1 M σ π ( j ) w π ( j )
    where π(j), π(j), j=1 . . . M are the indexes of a subset of users so-called active user vπ(j)εCM×1, j=1 . . . M are a set of orthogonal vectors, and dπ(j) includes information for the user π(j). In addition, dirty-paper pre-coding is used on top of the system such that if i>j, the interference of the user π(i) over user π(j) is zero.
  • For demodulation, the user π(j) multiplies the received vector to a normal vector u′π(j) where (.)′ denotes transpose conjugate operation. In the next section, we specify a method to select the set of active users, modulation vectors vπ(j), and demodulation vectors uπ(j) for j=1 . . . M.
  • Determination of the Active Users, Modulation, and Demodulation Vectors
  • In this part, it is assumed that the channel state information is available at the transmitter. Later, this algorithm is modified such that only partial channel state information is required.
  • Each stage of the algorithm includes two optimizing operations. First, for each user, finding a direction in which that user has maximum gain. Second, selecting the best user in terms of the larger gain. This optimization is performed in the null space of the former selected coordinates. In the following, the proposed algorithm is presented.
  • 1) Set j=1 and the condition matrix Geq=OM×M.
  • 2) Find σ2 π(j) where
    σ2 π(j)=maxrmaxx x′H r H′ r x
    x′x=1
    Geqx=0
    set π(j) and vπ(j) to be equal to the optimizing parameter r and x, respectively.
    3) Set u π ( j ) = 1 σ π ( j ) H π ( j ) v π ( j )
    4) Set gj=vπ(j), where gj is the jth column of the matrix Geq.
    5) j←j+1. If j≦M go to step two, otherwise stop.
    Modified Algorithm
  • As it has been mentioned before, in this algorithm, a major part of the processing can be accomplished at the receivers. Therefore the perfect channel state information is not required at the transmitter which results a significant decreasing in the rate of feedback.
  • 1) Set j=1 and Geq=QM×M.
  • 2) each user calculates σ2 r(j), defined as follows:
    σ2 r(j)maxx x′H r H′ r x
    x′x=1
    Geqx=0
    vr(j) represents the optimizing parameter x.
    3) Each user calculates u r ( j ) = 1 σ r ( j ) H r v r ( j )
    4) Each user sends σ2 r(j) and Vr(j) to the base station, if σr(j) 2≧th(j). th(j) is a threshold which is predetermined by the base station.
    5) Base station selects the user with the largest σ2 r(j). Let π(j) be the index of the selected user. The corresponding gain and coordinate of that user. The corresponding gain and coordinate of that user are σ2 π(j) and vπ(j), respectively.
    6) The π(j)th user sends Uπ(j)Hπ(j)wπ(j) i=1 . . . i−1 to the base station.
    7) Base station send vπ(j) to all users. All include vπ(j) in Geq as the jth column.
    8) j←j+1. If j≦M go to step two, otherwise stop.
    Feedback MIMO Channel and CQI Separately
  • Referring now to FIG. 37, shown is a block diagram of a system in which MIMO channel information for use in performing beam-forming, and MIMO/STC setup information are separately fed back in accordance with an embodiment of the invention. In the illustrated example, the MIMO/STC setup information is fed back on a CQICH (channel quality indication) feedback channel, various permutations of which are available in existing standards definitions, but it is to be understood that in this and the other examples that follow, any appropriate physical/logical channel can be employed to feed back the MIMO/STC setup information as required.
  • At the transmitter, there is a transmit beam-former 202 that uses matrix VT this being the transpose of the matrix v in the singular value decomposition of the channel H. The output of the beam-former is transmitted on M transmit antennas 204. This is received at the receiver by N receive antennas 206, and the MIMO channel H is measured as indicated at 208. There are many existing methods of measuring the channel. This may for example be done using pilot symbols transmitted at known locations in time and/or frequency, possibly using one of the formats introduced previously and performing interpolation if necessary. This may include receiver specific pilots and or generic pilots. Next, block 212 performs a singular value decomposition of the channel matrix H into the matrix product UDV where U and V are unitary matrices and D is a diagonal matrix containing the eigenvalues.
  • At 220, AMC/eigen assignment according to according to eigenvalue is performed for any appropriate frequency resolution, for example for a given sub-channel. A sub-channel may for example be a contiguous block of sub-carriers that have substantially the same eigenvectors/eigenvalues, As discussed previously, weak eigen-modes can be discarded. In some embodiments, all that needs to be fed back is an index of the eigen-modes that are to be used. Then, the receiver, after it reconstructs the H or V matrix from the fed back channel information, can re-construct the eigen-modes, and use each eigen-mode for a respective stream. This information is then sent back to the transmitter on the CQI feedback channel 222 or using some other mechanism.
  • For the channel information, preferably the difference between the new channel matrix H and the previous channel matrix E is measured and a differential is determined between the two most recent channel matrices. This amount is encoded at 210 and transmitted back to the receiver on the MIMO feedback channel 214. Advantageously, the differential of two consecutive channel matrices will have a significantly smaller dynamic range than would the actual channel matrix H or V matrix. This enables the MIMO feedback channel 214 to use fewer bits to transmit back effectively the same amount of channel information.
  • At the transmitter, the channel matrix H is reconstructed at 216 using the fed back channel differential and the previous channel matrix H. Singular value decomposition is performed at 218 to recover the V matrix component of the channel matrix H, and the transpose of this matrix is then used in the beam-former 202. Furthermore, the CQI feedback channel 222 feeds into the per stream AMC function 200 that performs adaptive modulation of coding on each stream using the channel quality information as sent back from the receiver. In the above-described embodiment, a differential of the channel matrix H is fed back. Equivalently, the unitary matrix V or a differential of the unitary matrix V could be fed back. Various detailed methods of feeding back the channel matrix or the unitary matrix V are provided below.
  • The embodiment of FIG. 37 and the other embodiments described generalize to an arbitrary number of transmit antennas and receive antennas. While a particular arrangement of components are shown for each of the various embodiments, it is to be understood that the functionality of these components can be combined or separated differently than shown on an implementation specific basis. Furthermore, FIG. 37 can be thought of representing either a system or a method.
  • Feedback MIMO Channel and CQI Jointly
  • Referring now to FIG. 3B, shown is a system example in which the MIMO channel and the CQI are jointly fed back in accordance with an embodiment of the invention. Shown in the transmit side is a per stream AMC and beam-former VT 240 that has outputs connected to M transmit antennas 242. On the receive side, there are N receive antennas 244 and there is a function that measures the MIMO channel H at 246. The MIMO channel H is differentially encoded at 248. The receiver has knowledge of a set of possible differentially encoded H (or v in which case SVD decomposition is performed at 250) matrices, for example 64 different differential matrices. The receiver determines the candidate differential H matrix that is closest to the actual differential. Each possible H matrix has an associated predetermined adaptive modulation and coding and an associated index. Therefore, by simply feeding back the index from the receiver to the transmitter, the transmitter can determine the proper beam-former VT, and the appropriate per stream adaptive modulation and coding to perform. The transmitter then reconstructs N at 254 and performs singular value decomposition at 256 to recover the unitary matrix V which is then used in the beam-former step. Note that while the illustrated embodiment shows H being differentially encoded and fed back, equivalently the unitary matrix could be differentially encoded and fed back.
  • Differential Scalar Quantizer—Element by Element Quantization
  • The two above-described embodiments employ the feedback of differentials in either the channel matrix H or the unitary matrix V. FIG. 39 shows a block diagram of an example of a differential scalar quantizer that can be used to feedback quantized differentials. In FIG. 39, the input 260 is the new value that needs to be quantized. This can be element in a channel matrix or a unitary matrix for example. Every k frames, this amount is passed through the scalar quantizer 262 and on to the feedback channel 264. This means that every k frames, the receiver feeds back the actual value as opposed to the differential value. This avoids the potential problem of drift that can occur over time due to ongoing differential quantization. For the remaining frames, quantization is performed. In the illustrated example, this consists of +1, −1 quantization 266. The quantization is performed on the basis of a difference between the current input 260 and the “previous input” 268 by difference function 270. The previous input is maintained by updating the value with the actual value every k frames in accumulator 272 and then applying any plus or minus quantizations as determined at the output of the +1, −1 quantizer 266 and storing the result in a delay element 274.
  • While the illustrated example uses +1, −1 quantization, this requiring one bit per element to be transmitted on the feedback channel 264, higher resolution quantization could alternatively be employed. Furthermore, some embodiments may not necessarily feature the scalar quantization step. Note that for a 4×4 channel matrix, each channel element is complex and therefore has an I and Q component. Therefore, to feedback quantized information for a 2×2 channel matrix requires eight bits, two bits per channel element, one bit per I and Q components,
  • ΔΣ Modulation 1-bit Quantizer
  • In accordance with another referred embodiment of the invention a ΔΣ modulator 1-bit quantizer is employed to determine the information to be fed back. An example of a 1st-order ΔΣ modulation encoder is shown in FIG. 40. Referring to FIG. 40, a new channel measurement is input at 280. This might for example be a C/I measurement for a particular channel element. An offset is applied at 282 so as to move the dynamic range of the channel measurement within the range of the ΔΣ signal modulator that follows. A limiter 286 is also shown that limits the dynamic range of the input to prevent ΔΣ overflow. A given implementation may not include either of the offset and limiter features or may include just one of them or both of them as illustrated. The input level is often less than the quantizer step size Δ and hence is denoted by αΔ where α<1 dependent on ΔΣ type. A dither signal may also be applied 289 to the 1st-order ΔΣ modulator input to eliminate the limit cycle inherent in the 1st-order modulators and in this instance is a sequence (Δ/8, −Δ/8). The remainder of the encoder is a classical ΔΣ modulators with the exception there are no delays in the signal paths, Once again, the output per I or Q component of a channel matrix is a plus or minus one. Again, different resolutions can be implemented if a given application needs the higher resolution. Furthermore, ΔΣ modulation can more generally be applied to any parameter for which feedback is to be implemented.
  • Multi-User Differential Feedback
  • FIG. 41 shows an example of a system that employs differential encoding of the channel matrix H from multiple receivers. This is simply an example to show that for the most part any of the examples given herein can be adapted for use with multiple users. With this example, there are two users each having a respective pair of antennas 300,302. Each user performs a channel measurement 304,306 respectively and differential encoding of the channel matrix 308,310. The channel information is then fed back to the transmitter where a per stream AMC and beam-forming is performed as indicated at 314. It is noted that the feedback channel from the users typically has limited capacity. This may be a dedicated channel for each user, or may be a channel that is shared across users in a scheduled fashion.
  • The differential encoder output may be grouped together to map to the existing CQI feedback channel or MIMO feedback channel.
  • Givens Feedback
  • In another embodiment of the invention, the V matrix determined through singular value decomposition is fed back from the receiver to the transmitter using Givens feedback. Unitary matrices have the property that they can be decomposed into a product of Givens matrices. In particular, an n×n V matrix can be decomposed into Givens matrices containing n2−n complex parameters. The parameters can be fed back directly, or differentially and/or quantized to potentially reduce the amount of feedback required. Then, at the transmitter, the Givens matrices can be reconstructed, and then the V matrix reconstructed as the product of the reconstructed Givens matrices.
  • An example of a system employing Givens feedback is shown FIG. 43. Shown is a transmit beam-former 320 with transmit antennas 322. At the receiver, receive antennas 324 receive signals, and the channel measurement is performed at 326. This produces the channel matrix which is then SVD decomposed at 328. Next, the V matrix is decomposed by the Givens transform 330 to produce a series of matrices G1, G2, . . . , the number of matrices being required being a function of the size of the channel matrix. Each such Givens matrix can then be uniquely represented by two parameters θ and C. These parameters are selected at 332 and differentially quantized at 334.
  • Then, the quantized parameters θ and C are fed back over the MIMO feedback channel 336, this requiring two parameters to be sent back for each Givens matrix. At the transmitter, the fed back parameters θ and C are reconstructed at 338, and then the beam-forming matrix V is reconstructed by determining the product of the Givens matrices generated using the reconstructed parameters, at 340. Finally, the transpose of the matrix V is used by the beam-former 320. The parameters may be directly fed back or differentially fed back.
  • Preferably, at the same time AMC/eigen assignment is performed on the basis of eigenvalues of the channel matrix of the SVD composition performed at 328 as described previously. This step is indicated at 332. The AMC/eigen assignment information is fed back over the CQI channel at 342. This information is fed back to the transmitter where per stream AMC is performed is indicated at 344.
  • Advantageously, for V matrix feedback, the base station is able to verify the integrity of the received matrix V by exploiting the orthogonality of the matrix.
  • By decomposing the SVD-based unitary V matrix into Givens matrices, the V matrix can be represented by n2−n independent complex parameters.
  • In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, 2(n2−n) bits (one bit for I and Q of each parameter) are used for the differential quantization of the unitary V matrix, although other methods of feeding back the parameters can be used.
  • In accordance with this embodiment an n stream CQI channel may also be used, preferably 4 bits each. Combining the Given's feedback and the CQI yields the total amount for the unitary matrix feedback of 2n2+2n bits. However, for the direct differential encoding approach the total feedback used is 2n2 including the CQI information, since it is embedded in H. FIG. 42 shows an example set of feedback requirements for N by N MIMO systems, in which a comparison is made between the number of bits fed back for the unitary matrix, fed back using Givens feedback and CQI channel information, as opposed to the direct H matrix feedback. It can be seen that the complexity becomes increasingly comparable as a number of transmit antennas increases.
  • 2-Antenna Givens Transform
  • The following is an SVD based Givens transform algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention suitable for 2-Transmit Antennas. With 2-antenna Givens transformation, 22−2=2 complex parameters are required to feedback the V matrix. There are multiple known formats for Given transformations any of which can be used. The Givens rotation for 2 transmit antennas (Format-A) includes: G = [ c ^ s ^ j θ ^ - s ^ - j θ ^ c ^ ]
    The parameter space includes θ={−π+π} and c={0,1} s−(1−c2)1/2.
  • An alternative format is the following Givens rotation for 2 transmit antenna (Format-B) that takes the form: G = [ cos ( η ) sin ( η ) - - sin ( η ) cos ( η ) ]
  • The parameter space includes π={−π+π} and η={−π+π}
  • 3-Antenna Givens Transform
  • An SVD based Givens transform algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described for 3-Transmit Antennas. With 3-antenna Givens transforms, n2−n=6 complex parameters can be used to completely represent the V matrix. These can be represented in the following Givens rotation for 3 transmit antenna (Format-A) includes G=G1G2G3 represented as follows where each of the three matrices has a respective parameter c (c1, c2, c3) and s (θ1, θ2, θ3) which differs between the three matrices although this is not shown. G = [ c s 0 - s * c 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 1 0 - s * 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 c s 0 - s * c ]
  • The parameter space includes
    θ1{−π,+π} and c1={0,1} for G1
    θ2{−π,+π} and c2={0,1} for G2
    θ3{−π,+π} and c3={0,1} for G3
    Preferably, these are quantized as follows:
    θ1→2 bit and c1→1 bit
    θ2→2 bit and c2→1 bit
    θ3→2 bit and c3→1 bit
  • It can be seen in the above example, the quantization performed for the parameter θ is more precise than that performed for the parameter C. It is generally the case that different quantization accuracies may be performed for the different parameters being fed back using given speed back. Through experimentation, it has been found that acceptable performance can be achieved with a less accurate C parameter. In some embodiments described below, certain C parameters can be ignored.
  • 4-Antenna Givens Transform
  • An SVD based Givens transform SQ algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described for 4-Transmit Antennas. 4-antenna Givens transformation requires 42−4-12 complex parameters. These can be represented in the Givens rotation for 4 transmit antenna (Format-A) as G=G1G2G3G4G5G6 represented as follows where each of the six matrices has a respective parameter c (c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6) and s (θ1, θ2, θ3, θ4, θ5, θ6): G = [ c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 0 s 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 - s * 0 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 c s 0 0 - s * c ]
    The parameter space includes
    θ1={−π+π} and c1={0,1} for G1
    θ2={−π+π} and c2={0,1} for G2
    θ3={−π+π} and C3={0,1} for G3
    θ4={−π+π} and C4={0,1} for G1
    θ5={−π+π} and C5={0,1} for G2
    θ6={−π+π} and C6={0,1} for G3
    The scalar quantizers can be implemented as follows;
    θ1→2 bit and c1→1 bit
    θ2→2 bit and c2→1 bit
    θ3→2 bit and c3→1 bit
    θ4→2 bit and c4→1 bit
    θ5→2 bit and c5→1 bit
    θ6→2 bit and c6→1 bit
    Givens Transform—General Case
  • An SVD based Givens transform algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described for n-Transmit Antennas. The Givens rotation for n transmit antennas (Format-A) includes: V = k = 1 n - 1 i = 1 n - k G ( k , i ) G ( k , i ) = [ 1 0 0 0 0 c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 ]
    Preferably, scalar quantization is performed for each of the parameters as discussed previously.
    Truncation of Givens Expansion
  • An SVD based Givens transform algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described that employs truncation of the Givens expansion. Preferably, weak eigen-modes may be discarded with application of water filling in the eigen domain. Each Given matrix is associated with one or more eigen-modes and respective eigenvalue. As such, if a given weak eigenvalue is to be discarded, then the associated Givens matrices can be discarded. In the receiver, the V matrix is re-generated, and then only the selected eigen-modes used to transmit streams as in the above example for eigen-modes selection.
  • For example, where the full Givens expansion for the 3×3 case is as follows: G = [ c s 0 - s * c 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 1 0 - s * 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 c s 0 - s * c ]
    this can be truncated by dropping the “weakest” eigen-mode. For example if the third matrix corresponds to the weakest eigen-mode, the truncated expansion is: G = [ c s 0 - s * c 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 1 0 - s * 0 c ]
    The full expansion above corresponds to all three eigenvectors of the channel. In contrast, the truncated expansion corresponds to only a single eigenvector. The correspondence of eigenvector to Givens matrices is a known math property of Givens expansions.
  • The following is another example of truncation of Givens expansion for a 4-antenna case. The Givens expansion for eigenvector #1 of a 4×4 channel matrix is as follows: G = [ c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 0 s 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 - s * 0 0 c ]
    The Givens expansion for eigenvectors 1 and 2 for a 4×4 system is as follows: G = [ c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 0 s 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 - s * 0 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c ]
    The Givens expansion for all four eigenvectors of the 4×4 system is as follows: G = [ c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ c 0 0 s 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 - s * 0 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 c s 0 0 - s * c 0 0 0 0 1 ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 c 0 s 0 0 1 0 0 - s * 0 c ] [ 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 c s 0 0 - s * c ]
  • It can be seen that discarding two eigen-modes reduces the Givens expansion by one of the six matrices while discarding three of the four eigen-modes will reduce the Givens expansion by three of the six matrices. Given that each matrix requires two parameters to be fed back, a corresponding reduction in the quantity of feedback information that needs to be transmitted is realized. Generally, it can be seen that in an arbitrary n×n case, a Givens expansion can be employed, and the amount of feedback can be optionally reduced by discarding one or more eigen-modes.
  • Bit Allocation for Givens Feedback—Full Scalar Quantization
  • An SVD based Givens transform algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described in which full scalar quantization is performed. As discussed above, it can be advantageous to use different quantizations for the various parameters being fed back using Givens feedback. Based on the pre-coding QoS requirement, the bit allocation may provide a tradeoff between performance and feedback penalty.
  • For the Givens parameter in Format-A, θ is uniformly distributed resulting in more bits being needed for accurate feedback, whereas C is non-uniformly distributed resulting in less bits being needed. In some implementations, some C have only minimum impact on performance and can be treated as constant without a substantial performance penalty.
  • Using a Lloyd-MAX quantizer the following bit allocations can be employed to realize a full scalar quantizer.
    # of Transmit Antennas
    2 3 4
    Givens matrix
    G1 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
    Bits to represent 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
    theta
    Bits to represent C 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
    Total bit allocation 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
    to Givens

    Bit Allocation for Givens Feedback - Partial Scalar Quantization
  • An SVD based Givens transform algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described in which partial scalar quantization is performed. With partial scalar quantization, a differential is not fed back for each and every parameter. In an example solution, a 1 bit or 0 bit is used for each parameter c and a differential 1-bit is used for each parameter theta. Another approach includes using less bits or zero bits for the non-significant Givens parameters.
  • The following is an example of bit allocation with partial scalar quantization for 2, 3 and 4 antennas. It can be seen that in a particular example, for the 3-antenna case for example, the C parameter is only fed back for the first of three Givens matrices, and a three bit value is sent back for theta for the first of the three matrices, and a one bit differential is used for theta for the other two matrices. This has the potential of reducing the number of feedback bits required from nine bits from the full quantization example given above to five bits for the example in the table.
    # of transmit
    2 3 4
    Givens matrix
    G1 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
    Theta
    2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
    C 2 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
    Bit allocation to 4 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1
    Givens
  • The following table shows an example set of feedback allocations for different MIMO configurations using Givens feedback with full scalar quantization versus partial scalar quantization with a 1-bit differential for theta and 1-bit for c. It can be seen that the savings in the number of bits required for feedback increase as the complexity of the MIMO configuration increases. Also shown in the table are the number of bits required for a Hausholder based feedback mechanism.
    MIMO CONFIGURATION
    2x2 3x1 3x2 3x3 4x1 4x2 4x3 4x4
    #of spatial 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
    streams
    #of parameters 1 2 3 3 3 5 6 6
    Full Scalar 4 3 9 9 9 15 18 18
    1-bit 2 2 6 6 6 10 12 12
    differential
    theta
    1-bit for c
    Hausholder
    4 4 9 9 11 11 15 15
  • The table below shows examples of the feedback allocations for various MIMO configurations comparing full scalar feedback to partial feedback in which a 1-bit differential for theta is employed, and 1-bit or zero bits are used for each c parameter. Again, the requirements for Hausholder feedback are also shown for the sake of comparison.
    MIMO Configuration
    2x2 3x1 3x2 3x3 4x1 4x2 4x3 4x4
    #of spatial 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
    streams
    #of parameters 1 2 3 3 3 5 6 6
    Full Scalar 4 3 9 9 9 15 18 18
    1-bit 2 2 4 4 5 7 9 9
    differential
    theta
    1-bit or zero bit
    for c
    Hausholder
    4 4 9 9 11 11 15 15

    Grassman Subspace Packing—Vector Quantization
  • With scalar quantization, be it full scalar or partial scalar, each feedback element pertains to one parameter of interest. This parameter can be a Givens parameter, or a channel matrix parameter from H or V for example, or some other value. In another embodiment, vector quantization is performed, in which each element fed back represents a vector, either in absolute terms or differential terms, and in respect of a set of parameters of interest. Each potential state for the output of the vector quantization operation is represented by a code word identifier/index which is fed back, and used by the transmitter to look up the vector. The vectors thus looked up are then used to generate the beam former in the transmitter. The vector might be a vector of a channel matrix, a vector of a V matrix (this would be a unitary vector), or a set of Givens parameters for example.
  • In one embodiment, an SVD based Givens transform vector quantization algorithm is provided that employs Grassmann Subspace Packing. However, other forms of vector quantization may alternatively be employed.
  • Each individual Givens matrix is a unitary matrix. The product of Givens matrices is a unitary matrix. The partial product of two or more Givens matrices is a unitary matrix. After determining a truncated or full Givens expansion, the resulting of unitary matrix may be quantized by using Grassmann sub-space packing (see for example D. J. Love, R. W. Heath Jr., and T. Strohmer, “Grassmannian Beamforming for Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Wireless Systems,” IEEE Transactions on Information Theory, vol. 49, pp. 2735-2747, October 2003). In this case, the code book for quantization of a unitary matrix may be considered as sub-space packing in a Grassmann manifold.
  • Two codebooks that might be used include the uniform distributed Grassmann space, and Block circulant DFT, but other codebooks may alternatively be employed.
  • An example of encoding using shape and gain quantizer according to an embodiment of the invention is shown in FIG. 44. The input to the shape and gain quantizer is a vector to be quantized. Preferably, this vector is a column of a unitary V matrix, but it may not necessarily be so. For example, it may be a set of Givens parameters that are not necessarily unitary, or a vector of the channel matrix H. The vector is normalized at 352. Please note however that this step is only required if the input is not a unit length vector. V should consist of unitary columns and rows and as such this step can be skipped if the input is a column/row of the V matrix. At step 356, shape quantization is performed. This involves determining from a codebook the closest codeword/vector in the codebook to the input vector. In the event the input vector is not unitary, the magnitude can be taken at 354 and this quantized with gain quantizer 358. Then, the shape and gain can be together fed back at 360. Once again, the gain quantization step is not needed if the input is unitary. For example, if a four element input vector is used, then a “codebook” of different four element vectors is developed to define the overall feedback space. The shape quantizer then determines which of the defined potential four element feedback vectors is closest to the input, and then all that needs to be fed back is the identity of this vector. This can then be looked up at the transmitter and used to re-generate the vector. In effect each vector is rounded off to the nearest vector in the code book. In a system in which there are 16 different codewords, the codeword can be uniquely identified by 4-bits. Thus, each column of the V matrix could be represented by 4-bits with this approach.
  • Spherical Codebook Quantizer
  • An SVD based Givens transform vector quantization algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described that employs a Spherical Code Based Quantizer. This method begins with putting the Givens parameters into a vector and then encoding the vector using a spherical code based quantizer. The following steps are performed:
    • 1. Given k element vector form the vector X←Rk
    • 2. Compute g=|X| and S=X/g
    • 3. Use the gain codebook to quantize g as g
    • 4. Find i such that αi=<sin−1xki+1 and compute
      h i(s)=X/∥X∥(∥ X L j ∥−∥X L −X∥)
    • 5. Find the nearest neighborhood h i(S) to hi(S)
    • 6. Compute hi −1(hi(S)) to identify the quantized shape S
    • 7. Compute the index gS and transmit
      In accordance with an embodiment, Leech Lattice is used as a codebook. Alternatively, a trellis-coded quantizer can also be employed.
      Feedback Setup Using Receiver Criteria
  • A receiver based Givens transform in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described in which search criteria axe established in the receiver.
      • In accordance with this embodiment of the invention channel filling is based on criteria including the receiver criteria. Based on the QoS requirements, the receiver determines the minimum feedback needed adaptively. The process may include the following:
  • determining the Givens truncation level;
  • based on the Scalar quantizer structure assigning parameter values; and/or
  • performing combinatorial searches of combinations.
    One example search criterion may include receiver MSE. Others may include Max SNR, Max Shannon capacity, or True receiver operational process defining as follows: l opt = arg min l { 1 , 2 , , L } MSE { E s N o tr ( I M + E s N o N r P l H H H HP l ) - 1 }
  • Based on the receiver criterion, exhaustive search the code book and maximize the given received based criterion to determine the best pre-code matrix. These equations represent exhaustively computing beam-forming weights to see which one is the best for a given criteria. SNR n , i r = ( h n , i r ) H ( h n , l r ( h n , l r ) H + σ 2 I ) - l h n , i r i , j = 2 , i j V n opt = arg max l ( max i ( SNR n , i r ) )
  • Referring now to FIG. 45, shown is an example of a system in which the receiver sets up criteria for searching. Much of this example is similar to the Givens feedback system of described above, and this material in common will not be repeated. After constructing the Givens matrices at 328, the set up receiver criteria 360 are used to search for a minimum. Examples of receiver criteria have been set out above, but other examples can alternatively be employed. The searching involves performing hypotheses testing against a set or dictionary of theta, c permutations 362 using the search minimum step 364. Once the minimum has been found, the parameters representing the minimum are selected at 366 and fed back on the MTMO channel 336 as before.
  • In any of the examples above, the Givens decomposition can be computed using any appropriate method. Iterative approaches may for example be employed such as Cholsky factorization and reverse order multiplication. These methods are known in the art and will not be described further here. It is noted that Givens decomposition is about 10% of the complexity of SVD computing complexity. This can be seen from the following table comparing the complexity of SVD versus Givens as a function of the number of transmit antennas, and the complexity is measured in terms of multiply and add operations.
    COMPLEXITY
    ANTENNAS SVD GIVENS GIVENS/SVD
    1 21 0
    2 168 12 7.14%
    3 567 54 9.52%
    4 1344 14 10.71%
    5 2625 300 11.43%
    6 4536 540 11.90%
    7 7203 882 12.24%
    8 10752 1344 12.50%
  • The following table shows a comparison of the complexity of Givens based feedback as opposed to Hausholder based feedback as a function of the number of the transmit antennas. It can be see that the Hausholder approach is significantly more complex.
    # of Givens Hausholder
    transmit Complex Complex Complex Complex Complex Comple
    Figure US20080108310A1-20080508-P00899
    antennas Division Multiply Add Comparison Multiply Add Storag
    Figure US20080108310A1-20080508-P00899
    Figure US20080108310A1-20080508-P00899
    3 3 30 30 32 259 160 32
    4 4 56 56 64 771 672 64
    6 6 132 132 256 3843 3744 256
    8 8 240 240 1024 20227 20128 1024
    12 12 552 552 16384 413443 413344 16384

    Example of Codebook Construction for Vector Pre-Coding
  • An example of Vector Pre-coding (code-book construction) for purposes of context and comparison will now be described. The cross-correlation of the codeword in this example has a block circulant structure. The diagonal rotation matrix Q is defined as: Q = [ j 2 π L u 1 0 0 j 2 π L u L ] u 1 U [ u 1 u L ]
    Matrix P, is selected from sub-matrixes of DET matrix as P 1 = [ d c 1 d c N 1 ] ( D N l ) m × n = [ j 2 π N l ( m - 1 ) ( n - 1 ) ] m × n D = [ d 1 d N l ]
    The codebook can be constructed as:
    Pl=QlPl l=2,3 . . . L
  • The codebook can be optimized by choosing rotation matrix Q indexes
    c=└c1 . . . cM 1
    The code book can be optimized by choosing rotation matrix Q indexes
    u=└u1 . . . cN 1
    By exhaustive search of the codebook we have l opt = arg min l { 1 , 2 , , L } MSE { E s N o tr ( I M + E s N o N r P l H H H HP l ) - 1 }
    Examples of Codebook Construction for Matrix Pre-Coding
  • An overview of Matrix Pre-coding (column by column vector quantize channel-1) for purposes of context and comparison will now be described. Preferably, the V matrix is quantized column by column and recursively.
    STEP-0: Denote the beam-forming matrix as V = [ v 11 v 12 v 12 v 21 v 22 v 23 v 31 v 32 v 33 v 41 v 42 v 43 ]
    STEP-1: Quantize the first column of V denoted as v1 as follows. {circumflex over (v)}=arg max 1 ∥uHv1
    where C1 is a codebook containing unit 4-vectors for quantization. {circumflex over (v)}1 has the maximum inner product among all unit vectors in the codebook.
    STEP-2: Compute Hausholder reflection matrix as follows F 1 = I - 2 w 1 2 w 1 w 1 H
    where φ1 is the phase of v11 F 1 V = [ 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 v ^ 11 v ^ 12 0.0 v ^ 21 v ^ 22 0.0 v ^ 31 v ^ 32 ] where v 2 = [ v ^ 11 v ^ 12 v ^ 21 v ^ 22 v ^ 31 v ^ 32 ]
    where two properties are employed to get the result, i.e. {circumflex over (v)}11 is real and the unitary property of V Since both F1 and V are unitary, V2 is unitary. From STEP-2, we see that the size of V2 is 3 by 2 and it is reduced from that of V1 by one on both the row and column dimensions.
    STEP-3: Quantize the first column of V2 denoted as v2, using another codebook of unit 3-vectors, whose first element of each codeword is real.
    STEP-4: Construct a Hausholder reflection matrix F2
    STEP-5: Multiply F2 with V2 as follows. F 2 V 2 = [ 2 0.0 0.0 v ~ 11 0.0 v ~ 21 ] where v 3 = [ v ~ 11 v ~ 21 ]
    The reconstruction of the beam-forming matrix V is as follows:
    STEP-0; Two vectors, v3 and v2, are reconstructed using the feedback quantization indexes and the corresponding 2-vector and 3-vector codebooks.
    STEP-1: Compute a Hausholder matrix using the reconstructed V2 as F 2 = I - 2 w 2 ww H
    where w={circumflex over (v)}2−e1 and {circumflex over (v)}2 is the reconstructed 3-vector; F2 can be stored beforehand to reduce computation.
    STEP-2: V2 can be reconstructed as V ^ 2 = F 2 [ 1 0 0 0 v ^ 3 ]
    STEP-3; we reconstruct the first column of V using the quantization index and compute a Hausholder matrix as F 1 = I - 2 w 2 ww H
    where w={circumflex over (v)}1−e1 and {circumflex over (v)}1 is the reconstructed first column of V.
    STEP-4 the beam-forming matrix V is given by V ^ = F 1 [ 1 0 0 0 0 V ^ 2 0 ]
  • The codebook is constructed such that the codeword vectors distribute on the n-dimension complex unit sphere uniformly. Additionally, the firs: element of each codeword is set to be real for the next step.
  • The Hausholder matrix can be computed and stored beforehand for small codebooks. Even in the case that there is no quantization error, the reconstructed matrix could be different from the original V by a global phase on each column and this is fine with closed loop MIMO.
  • Example of 2-Transmit Antenna Codebook for Givens Feedback
  • Pre-design the rotation matrix for 2 transmit antennas, and then the rotation matrix is parameterized. A set of parameterized rotation matrixes serves as codebook. V n 1 , n 2 l = [ n 2 cos θ n 1 - n 2 sin θ n 1 sin θ n 1 cos θ n 1 ] ϕ n 2 = 2 π n 2 N 2 , n 2 = 0 , 1 N 2 - 1 θ n 1 = 2 π n 1 N 1 , n 1 = 0 , 1 N 1 - 1
    Feedback Differential Codebook Index
  • According to an embodiment of the invention a differential index feedback is provided as illustrated pictorially in FIG. 48. The differential index is representative of the sub-space searching. According to this embodiment the channel will not change very fast. Therefore, the indices of consecutive feedbacks will not be far from the previous feed-back.
  • Avoiding the Impact of Ageing
  • A MIMO feedback channel ageing algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described, in which receiver ageing beam-former correction is utilized.
  • For a mobile MIMO channel the channel matrix may be time-varying:
    Time-0→H0=U0D0V0
    Time 1→H1=U1D1V1
    The beam forming matrix V0 sent to the transmitter may already be old by the time it is utilized for transmission. However, the receiver may still be able to compute the latest receiver beam forming matrix U0 as follows:
    U 1 ′y=U 1 ′U 1 D 1 V 1 ′V 0 ′s+U 1 ′n=D 1 V 1 ′V 0 s+n
    This may prevent the ageing impact at receiver side, the ageing impact potentially causing the inter-antenna interference. In the above example, at the receiver the received sequence y has been multiplied by the latest beam-forming matrix U1, rather than use U0 that would have been used with the channel information at time 0. In the result, the product V1′V0 or likely be close to the identity matrix and can be ignored; alternatively given that both V1′ and V0 are known at the receiver, the effect of this can also be divided out at the receiver. This would increase the complexity however.
    Physical Layer Design
  • A CQICH Support of Differential Encoding Algorithm in accordance with an embodiment of the invention will now be described. For OFDM systems, preferably differential encoding is used to cross multiple sub-carriers to feedback the vector index or other feedback information. The following is an example of a mini-tile modulation scheme for sending back a vector index of zero or one. Preferably this would be transmitted on two sub-carriers. In this case, two different phases are transmitted for vector index zero, and a different arrangement of the same phases is sent for vector index one.
    Vector index Mn,8, Mn,θm+1
    0 P0, P1
    1 P1 ,P0
    P 0 = exp j π 4
    P 1 = exp j 3 π 4
  • Another example is shown in FIG. 46, this being a feedback approach that allows the transmission of one of eight different vector indexes can be used to transmit up to 3-bits of information. The vector index might for example be an index of codebook, or alternatively the raw bits might be used to indicated feedback Information, be it channel feedback or Givens feedback or unitary matrix feedback. In the example shown, a tile generally indicated at 370 is four sub-carriers by three symbols, and the four corner sub-carrier locations in the tile are used for transmitting pilot information. The remaining eight sub-carrier locations over the three symbols are used to transmit the vector index. The encoding used for the index is indicated in the table generally indicated at 372. In this example, four different phases are used, and a codeword consisting of eight phases is used to represent each of the potential vector indices. The receiver of the feedback information can then recover the phase information and perform a correlation to identify the transmitted vector index and thereby recover the feedback information.
  • Another example is shown in FIG. 47 for the case where a receiver has two antennas. In this case, pilot symbols are sent in different locations for the two antennas, but identical feedback information is sent on the remaining eight sub-carriers, the same as in FIG. 46. For a given antennae is transmitting its pilot symbols.
  • In yet another example, shown in FIG. 48, two different users are feeding back the two patterns indicated at 380,382 respectively. Similar to the two antenna case of FIG. 47, each of the two users transmits pilots in different locations within the tile so as to not interfere with the other users pilots. In this case, each user transmits eight sub-carrier locations containing the vector index. The data transmitted by the two users will be different, and the receiver of the feedback information will need to distinguish between the two. According to an embodiment of the invention STTD antenna assignment with power weighting may be used. This reduces inter-code interference and reduces the feedback bandwidth required.
  • FIGS. 49 and 50 shows a concatenation of STC/MIMO with a beam-former in accordance with an embodiment of the invention.
  • Each embodiment is generalizable to an arbitrary number of sub-carriers and/or an arbitrary number of transmit antennas/receive antennas as will be apparent to one skilled in the art. Embodiments provide transmitters adapted to generate signals containing the disclosed transmit code-sets/sub-carrier allocations methods of transmitting such signals, receivers adapted to receive such transmissions, and methods of receiving and decoding such signals.
  • Numerous modifications and variations of the present invention are possible in light of the above teachings. It is therefore to be understood that within the scope of the appended claims, the invention may be practised otherwise than as specifically described herein.

Claims (24)

1. A MIMO system comprising:
a transmitter having multiple transmit antennas;
at least one receiver, each receiver having at least one receive antenna;
each receiver being adapted to transmit at least one type of feedback information selected from a group consisting of:
information for use in performing beam-forming;
antenna selection/grouping information.
2. The system of claim 1 wherein a transmission format to each receiver is selected from a group of transmission formats consisting of:
spatial multiplexing;
vector weighted spatial multiplexing;
matrix weighted spatial multiplexing;
K-stream spatial multiplexing employing more than K transmit antennas;
single stream STTD;
single stream STTD with proportional weighting and antenna selection;
multi-stream STTD;
multi-stream STTD with layer weighting;
multi-stream STTD with a combination of layer weighting and proportional weighting; and
hybrid beam-forming and spatial multiplexing.
3. The system of claim 2 wherein a defined sub-set of available formats is made available for a given receiver, and wherein the given receiver feeds back a selection of one of the defined sub-set of available formats.
4. The system of claim 1 wherein:
each receiver performs respective channel measurements and feeds back information for use in performing beam-forming based on the respective channel measurements.
5. The system of claim 4 wherein the information for use in performing beam-forming is selected from a group consisting of:
a) elements of a measured channel matrix;
b) elements of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix;
c) parameters of a Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix;
d) parameters of a truncated Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix, where one or more eigen-vectors are discarded;
e) differentially encoded elements of a measured channel matrix;
f) differentially encoded elements of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix;
g) differentially encoded parameters of a Givens decomposition or truncated Givens decomposition of a V matrix of a SVD decomposed channel matrix;
h) Householder decomposition;
i) full scalar quantization of any of the information types of a) through h);
j) partial scalar quantization of any of the information types a) through g);
k) scalar quantization of any one of the information types a) through h) where varying resolution is used to quantize parameters;
l) vector quantization of any of the information types of a) through h);
m) a combination of scalar quantization and differential quantization for any of the information types a) through h);
n) using a Delta Sigma quantizer for any of the information types a) through h).
o) binary beam-forming weights;
p) a differential index into a set of vector quantizations; and
q) pre-defined codebook.
6. The system of claim 1 wherein beam-forming feedback is performed by each receiver as a function of receiver specific criteria.
7. The system of claim 6 wherein the receiver specific criteria is selected from a group consisting of:
b) Max SNR;
b) Max Shannon capacity; and
c) True receiver operational process.
8. The system of claim 1 wherein antenna selection/grouping information is at least one information type selected from a group consisting of:
a) selection between SM (spatial multiplexing) and STTD (space time transmit diversity) transmission format;
b) selection of particular antennas for SM transmission;
c) selection and grouping of particular antennas for STTD transmission; and
d) eigen-mode selection information.
9. The system of claim 1 further comprising the receiver determining the antenna selection/grouping information by performing a step selected from a group of steps consisting of:
performing SVD decomposition and discarding weak eigen-modes;
selecting antennas using determinants of sub-MIMO channel matrices.
10. The system of claim 1 wherein feed back and beam-forming and/or antenna selection/grouping is performed for sub-carriers of a multi-carrier system to a resolution selected from a group consisting of:
a) for every sub-carrier individually;
b) for groups of consecutive sub-carriers;
c) for an entire set of sub-carriers;
d) for sets of groups of sub-carriers.
11. The system of claim 1 wherein transmission matrices and feedback are in accordance with one of FIGS. 11 to 14.
12. The system of claim 1 wherein:
the transmitter transmits pilots on each transmit antenna for use in performing channel estimation.
13. The system of claim 11 wherein at least some of the pilots are punctured pilots.
14. The system of claim 11 wherein at least some of the pilots comprise un-coded pilots for use by multiple receivers.
15. The system of claim 11 wherein the pilots comprise user specific pre-coded pilots for use by particular receivers receivers.
16. The system of claim 11 wherein the pilots comprise user specific pre-coded pilots for use by particular receivers receivers and un-coded pilots for use by multiple receivers.
17. The system of claim 11 wherein the pilot patterns are as shown in any one of FIGS. 17-23 with generalizations as described.
18. The system of claim 11 wherein the pilot patterns are as shown in one of FIGS. 26-31 with generalizations as described.
19. The system of claim 1 wherein feedback information is transmitted using a feedback channel having the structure of one of FIGS. 46 to 48 with generalizations as described.
20. The system of claim 1 wherein at least one receiver has a plurality of receive antennas.
21. The system of claim 1 wherein the at least one receiver comprises a plurality of receivers.
22. The system of claim 1 wherein sub-channels are defined using at least one of:
AMC sub-channels, where respective adaptive modulation and coding is defined for each AMC sub-channel;
PUSC sub-channels.
23. A receiver adapted to implement receiver functionality of claim 1.
24. A transmitter adapted to implement transmitter functionality of claim 1.
US11/630,391 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods Active 2030-03-18 US9271221B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/630,391 US9271221B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US58135604P 2004-06-22 2004-06-22
US58229804P 2004-06-24 2004-06-24
US60117804P 2004-08-13 2004-08-13
US61462104P 2004-09-30 2004-09-30
US61946104P 2004-10-15 2004-10-15
US64269705P 2005-01-10 2005-01-10
US11/630,391 US9271221B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
PCT/CA2005/000958 WO2005125044A1 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Closed loop mimo systems and methods

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CA2005/000958 A-371-Of-International WO2005125044A1 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Closed loop mimo systems and methods

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/000,542 Continuation US9628153B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2016-01-19 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080108310A1 true US20080108310A1 (en) 2008-05-08
US9271221B2 US9271221B2 (en) 2016-02-23

Family

ID=35510066

Family Applications (9)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/630,391 Active 2030-03-18 US9271221B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US11/630,385 Active 2028-06-06 US8116262B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US13/342,654 Active 2025-07-17 US9008013B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2012-01-03 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US14/685,252 Active 2025-12-10 US10263677B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2015-04-13 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US15/000,542 Active US9628153B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2016-01-19 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US15/486,060 Active US10554272B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2017-04-12 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US16/373,183 Active US10581500B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2019-04-02 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US16/745,516 Active US11201648B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2020-01-17 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US16/749,687 Active 2025-07-30 US11258489B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2020-01-22 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks

Family Applications After (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/630,385 Active 2028-06-06 US8116262B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2005-06-22 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US13/342,654 Active 2025-07-17 US9008013B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2012-01-03 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US14/685,252 Active 2025-12-10 US10263677B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2015-04-13 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US15/000,542 Active US9628153B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2016-01-19 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US15/486,060 Active US10554272B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2017-04-12 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US16/373,183 Active US10581500B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2019-04-02 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks
US16/745,516 Active US11201648B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2020-01-17 Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US16/749,687 Active 2025-07-30 US11258489B2 (en) 2004-06-22 2020-01-22 Methods and systems for enabling feedback in wireless communication networks

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (9) US9271221B2 (en)
EP (4) EP1766806B1 (en)
HK (1) HK1118650A1 (en)
WO (2) WO2005125044A1 (en)

Cited By (214)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060008021A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-12 Nokia Corporation Reduction of self-interference for a high symbol rate non-orthogonal matrix modulation
US20060029157A1 (en) * 2004-08-09 2006-02-09 Texas Instruments Incorporated Wireless precoding methods
US20060035643A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2006-02-16 Vook Frederick W Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US20060039499A1 (en) * 2004-08-17 2006-02-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for space-time block coding
US20060039494A1 (en) * 2004-07-13 2006-02-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for beamforming in a multi-antenna system
US20060071807A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-06 Sadowsky John S Method and apparatus for performing sequential closed loop MIMO
US20060093062A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data using space-time block coding
US20060093066A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for space-time-frequency block coding
US20060093060A1 (en) * 2004-11-02 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd MIMO system and method
US20060098754A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-05-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Beam and power allocation method for MIMO communication system
US20060104382A1 (en) * 2004-10-27 2006-05-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving signals in multiple input multiple output wireless communication system employing beam forming scheme
US20060107167A1 (en) * 2004-11-16 2006-05-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiple antenna communication system using automatic repeat request error correction scheme
US20060120478A1 (en) * 2004-11-15 2006-06-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a multiple-input multiple-output communication system
US20060120470A1 (en) * 2004-11-15 2006-06-08 In-Seok Hwang System for communicating channel quality information
US20060146856A1 (en) * 2004-12-30 2006-07-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Adaptive subchannel and bit allocation method using partial channel information feedback in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system
US20060153312A1 (en) * 2005-01-07 2006-07-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for space-time frequency block coding in a wireless communication system
US20060171482A1 (en) * 2005-01-28 2006-08-03 Trachewsky Jason A Initiation of a MIMO communication
US20060205412A1 (en) * 2005-03-09 2006-09-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System and method for controlling resource allocation in a multicell communication system
US20070032206A1 (en) * 2005-08-04 2007-02-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Spatial multiplexing detection apparatus and method in MIMO system
US20070032199A1 (en) * 2005-08-02 2007-02-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for receiving channel quality information in a mobile communication system
US20070099578A1 (en) * 2005-10-28 2007-05-03 Kathryn Adeney Pre-coded diversity forward channel transmission system for wireless communications systems supporting multiple MIMO transmission modes
US20070104288A1 (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-10 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for utilizing givens rotation expressions for asymmetric beamforming matrices in explicit feedback information
US20070104163A1 (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-10 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for utilizing tone grouping with givens rotations to reduce overhead associated with explicit feedback information
US20070135052A1 (en) * 2005-12-10 2007-06-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Downlink beamforming apparatus in OFDMA system and transmission apparatus including the same
US20070149236A1 (en) * 2005-12-27 2007-06-28 Naden James M Transmit power allocation in a distributed MIMO system
US20070155336A1 (en) * 2005-11-17 2007-07-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for eliminating multi-user interference
US20070160162A1 (en) * 2005-10-31 2007-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and system for transmitting data in a communication system
US20070183521A1 (en) * 2006-02-09 2007-08-09 Himax Technologies Limited Method of channel estimation
US20070201568A1 (en) * 2006-01-27 2007-08-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for estimating carrier-to-interference and noise ratio in a broadband wireless communication system
US20070213013A1 (en) * 2006-03-08 2007-09-13 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for utilizing givens rotation to reduce feedback information overhead
US20070223619A1 (en) * 2006-03-06 2007-09-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for feeding back information on channel state for scheduling in multiple antenna system
US20070226287A1 (en) * 2006-03-24 2007-09-27 Lin Xintian E Mimo receiver and method for beamforming using cordic operations
US20070230383A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-10-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving a signal in a wireless communication system
US20070242770A1 (en) * 2006-03-27 2007-10-18 Byoung-Hoon Kim Feedback of channel state information for MIMO and subband scheduling in a wireless communication system
US20070253508A1 (en) * 2006-04-19 2007-11-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting effective channel in a multi-user MIMO system
US20070258541A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2007-11-08 Tomoya Yamaura Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20070274411A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2007-11-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Signal generation using phase-shift based pre-coding
US20070280360A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2007-12-06 Ihm Bin C Method of Processing Received Signals in a Multi-Input Multi-Output (Mimo) System
US20070280373A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2007-12-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Phase shift based precoding method and transceiver for supporting the same
US20070283210A1 (en) * 2006-06-02 2007-12-06 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Design of Spherical Lattice Codes for Lattice and Lattice-Reduction-Aided Decoders
US20070297529A1 (en) * 2005-11-17 2007-12-27 Shengli Zhou Recursive and trellis-based feedback reduction for MIMO-OFDM with rate-limited feedback
US20080002601A1 (en) * 2006-06-30 2008-01-03 Coronel Pedro E Method and apparatus for relaying spatially-multiplexed signals
US20080013644A1 (en) * 2006-07-14 2008-01-17 Klaus Hugl Data processing method, data transmission method, data reception method, apparatus, codebook, computer program product, computer program distribution medium
US20080051150A1 (en) * 2006-08-23 2008-02-28 Fujitsu Limited Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20080056402A1 (en) * 2006-09-06 2008-03-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting antenna in an orthogonalized spatial multiplexing system
US20080056414A1 (en) * 2006-08-31 2008-03-06 Kim Sung-Jin Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a multi-antenna system, and system using the same
US20080075181A1 (en) * 2004-12-09 2008-03-27 Zte Corporation Pilot Allocation Method and Device of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing System
US20080075196A1 (en) * 2006-06-14 2008-03-27 Samsung Electronic Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a closed-loop multi-antenna system
US20080089442A1 (en) * 2006-09-19 2008-04-17 Lg Electronics Inc. method of performing phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for supporting the same in a wireless communication system
US20080123768A1 (en) * 2006-10-26 2008-05-29 Haim Harel Method, system and apparatus for applying hybrid ARQ to the control of transmit diversity
US20080125048A1 (en) * 2006-11-28 2008-05-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for estimating and reducing interference in wireless communication systems
US20080130506A1 (en) * 2006-12-05 2008-06-05 Shilpa Talwar Transmission signaling techniques to enhance receiver interference mitigation performance
US20080136735A1 (en) * 2006-08-15 2008-06-12 Navini Networks, Inc. Method for Antenna Array Partitioning
US20080144737A1 (en) * 2006-12-19 2008-06-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Beamspace-time coding based on channel quality feedback
US20080152028A1 (en) * 2004-11-02 2008-06-26 Nec Corporation Ofdm Communication System
US20080165868A1 (en) * 2007-01-09 2008-07-10 Mark Kent Method and system for codebook design of mimo pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US20080165728A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-10 Navini Networks, Inc. Method and System for Scheduling Uplink Sounding Signals
US20080187060A1 (en) * 2007-02-02 2008-08-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-user data transmission/reception system and mode determination method
US20080188192A1 (en) * 2007-02-05 2008-08-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting transmission mode in multi-antenna system
US20080198946A1 (en) * 2007-02-14 2008-08-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20080205533A1 (en) * 2006-09-19 2008-08-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US20080212702A1 (en) * 2007-02-16 2008-09-04 Interdigital Technology Corporation Precoded pilot transmission for multi-user and single user mimo communications
US20080219376A1 (en) * 2007-03-05 2008-09-11 Xiao-Feng Qi Methods and arrangements for communicating in a multiple input multiple output system
US20080232501A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Static and differential precoding codebook for mimo systems
US20080248753A1 (en) * 2007-04-06 2008-10-09 Inha-Industry Partnership Institute Method and apparatus for retransmitting data based on antenna scheduling in MIMO system
US20080253337A1 (en) * 2007-04-16 2008-10-16 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for sfbc/stbc transmission of orthogonally coded signals with angle feedback in a diversity transmission system
US20080260053A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2008-10-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data using space-time block coding
US20080273583A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-06 Kee-Bong Song Channel estimation for ofdm-based wireless communication system using sparsely spaced pilot subcarriers
US20080273612A1 (en) * 2007-05-01 2008-11-06 Khojastepour Mohammad A Codebook Method for A Multiple Input Multiple Output Wireless System
US20080273452A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-06 Farooq Khan Antenna mapping in a MIMO wireless communication system
US20080285686A1 (en) * 2005-07-29 2008-11-20 Norman Beaulieu Antenna Selection Apparatus and Methods
US20080298482A1 (en) * 2007-05-30 2008-12-04 Rensburg Cornelius Van Multi-user MIMO feedback and transmission in a wireless communication system
US20080299917A1 (en) * 2007-05-29 2008-12-04 Angeliki Alexiou Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US20080310353A1 (en) * 2007-06-18 2008-12-18 Motorola, Inc. Method and Apparatus to Facilitate Use of Default Transmitter-Receiver Configurations
US20080318520A1 (en) * 2007-06-01 2008-12-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmission and reception in multiple input multiple output system with replay station
US20080318606A1 (en) * 2006-02-02 2008-12-25 Fujitsu Limited Wireless transmission method, and wireless transmitter and wireless receiver
US20090016463A1 (en) * 2006-04-06 2009-01-15 Dong Wook Roh Method for transmitting channel state information in multiple antenna system
US20090042617A1 (en) * 2007-08-10 2009-02-12 Guangjie Li Beam selection in open loop mu-mimo
US20090117929A1 (en) * 2007-11-05 2009-05-07 Zhen Zhong Frankie Shuai Systems And Methods For Managing Access Channels
US20090129499A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2009-05-21 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US20090137237A1 (en) * 2005-09-26 2009-05-28 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Wireless communication system, base station device, mobile station device, and macrodiversity selection method
US20090147748A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2009-06-11 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Transmission apparatus, reception apparatus, mobile communications system and transmission control method
US20090147881A1 (en) * 2004-09-10 2009-06-11 Lin Xintian E Closed loop feedback in mimo systems
US20090196272A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2009-08-06 Fujitsu Limited Mobile station, base station and radio communication method
US20090207765A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2009-08-20 Tomoya Yamaura Wireless Communication System, Wireless Communication Apparatus, and Wireless Communication Method
US20090233557A1 (en) * 2008-03-14 2009-09-17 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless communications apparatus
US20090232241A1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2009-09-17 Redline Communications Inc. Low complexity optimal soft mimo receiver
US20090274226A1 (en) * 2008-05-05 2009-11-05 Motorola, Inc. Sounding channel based feedback in a wireless communication system
US7616695B1 (en) 2004-06-17 2009-11-10 Marvell International Ltd. MIMO equalizer design: an algorithmic perspective
US20090298509A1 (en) * 2006-01-19 2009-12-03 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Radio transmission device and radio transmission method
US20090316807A1 (en) * 2006-01-13 2009-12-24 Sang Gook Kim Method and apparatus for achieving transmit diversity and spatial multiplexing using antenna selection based on feedback information
US20100009649A1 (en) * 2008-07-09 2010-01-14 Infineon Technologies Ag Channel estimator
US20100067512A1 (en) * 2008-09-17 2010-03-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Uplink transmit diversity schemes with 4 antenna ports
US20100103044A1 (en) * 2007-03-30 2010-04-29 Panasonic Corporation Radio communication system, radio communication apparatus, and radio communication method
US20100135203A1 (en) * 2007-08-02 2010-06-03 Tsuguo Maru Mimo communication system having deterministic communication path and antenna arrangement method therfor
CN101729477A (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-06-09 三星电子株式会社 Method for transmitting signal in multiple carrier wireless transmission system
US20100157921A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2010-06-24 Lin Xintian E Codebook generation system and associated methods
US20100166097A1 (en) * 2007-08-31 2010-07-01 Hua Zhou Wireless Communication System And Wireless Communication Method
US20100172424A1 (en) * 2009-01-06 2010-07-08 Yona Perets Efficient mimo transmission schemes
US20100172430A1 (en) * 2009-01-05 2010-07-08 Ezer Melzer Precoding codebooks for mimo communication systems
US20100195752A1 (en) * 2007-06-14 2010-08-05 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Transmitter/receiver for controlling multiuser multiple input multiple output system and method thereof
US20100202500A1 (en) * 2007-09-19 2010-08-12 Bin Chul Ihm Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20100215007A1 (en) * 2009-02-20 2010-08-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Channel interleaver for transmission of multiple code blocks in a wireless communication system
US20100220804A1 (en) * 2004-02-19 2010-09-02 Broadcom Corporation Asymmetrical mimo wireless communications
US20100226451A1 (en) * 2007-10-08 2010-09-09 Yun-Sang Park Apparatus and method for channel estimation in wireless communication system
US20100232527A1 (en) * 2004-09-10 2010-09-16 Qinghua Li Interpolation in channel state feedback
US20100254468A1 (en) * 2007-10-26 2010-10-07 Kim Ji Hyung Pilot design method, recording medium, and transmission apparatus
US20100254474A1 (en) * 2009-04-06 2010-10-07 Krishna Srikanth Gomadam Feedback Strategies for Multi-User MIMO Communication Systems
US20100260288A1 (en) * 2008-01-31 2010-10-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless transmission method and apparatus
US20100266061A1 (en) * 2007-12-28 2010-10-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and device for pre-coding in multiple input multiple output system
US20100267341A1 (en) * 2009-04-21 2010-10-21 Itsik Bergel Multi-Point Opportunistic Beamforming with Selective Beam Attenuation
US20100297958A1 (en) * 2009-05-19 2010-11-25 Shinichi Murakami Transceiver
CN101908950A (en) * 2010-08-16 2010-12-08 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for sending downlink and uplink control signals through multi-antenna system
US20100309996A1 (en) * 2007-12-26 2010-12-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of Transmitting Feedback Information for Performing Collaborative Mimo
US20100310020A1 (en) * 2006-04-06 2010-12-09 Chao-Ming Huang Data recovery system and method thereof
US20100330925A1 (en) * 2006-05-30 2010-12-30 Severine Catreux-Erceg Method and Apparatus to Improve Closed Loop Transmit Diversity Modes Performance via Interference Suppression in a WCDMA Network Equipped with a Rake Receiver
US20110007685A1 (en) * 2009-07-10 2011-01-13 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Downlink Channel Sounding in Wireless Communications Systems
US20110026427A1 (en) * 2008-04-02 2011-02-03 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus in relaying system
US20110051834A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2011-03-03 Moon Il Lee Method of transmitting of data and configuring a codebook in multi antenna system
US20110075606A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2011-03-31 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US20110096704A1 (en) * 2009-02-27 2011-04-28 Adoram Erell Signaling of dedicated reference signal (drs) precoding granularity
US20110105064A1 (en) * 2008-06-27 2011-05-05 Kyocera Corporation Radio communication device and radio communication method
US20110110450A1 (en) * 2009-11-09 2011-05-12 Krishna Srikanth Gomadam Asymmetrical feedback for coordinated transmission systems
US20110150052A1 (en) * 2009-12-17 2011-06-23 Adoram Erell Mimo feedback schemes for cross-polarized antennas
US7978759B1 (en) 2005-03-24 2011-07-12 Marvell International Ltd. Scalable equalizer for multiple-in-multiple-out (MIMO) wireless transmission
US20110194632A1 (en) * 2010-02-10 2011-08-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiple input multiple output communication method and system exchanging coordinated rank information for neighbor cell
US20110194647A1 (en) * 2006-08-22 2011-08-11 Nec Laboratories America, Inc Method for Transmitting an Information Sequence
US20110194638A1 (en) * 2010-02-10 2011-08-11 Adoram Erell Codebook adaptation in mimo communication systems using multilevel codebooks
US20110222627A1 (en) * 2006-10-26 2011-09-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for codebook exchange in a multiple access wireless communication system
KR101073296B1 (en) 2009-09-30 2011-10-12 인하대학교 산학협력단 Scheduling mehtod and the apparatus in multiuser mimo uplink
US20110255635A1 (en) * 2008-12-21 2011-10-20 Moon Il Lee Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
US20110299616A1 (en) * 2010-06-03 2011-12-08 National Chiao Tung University System and method of transmit diversity for wireless communications
US20110299623A1 (en) * 2009-02-16 2011-12-08 Zte Corporation Device and method for processing beamforming frequency
US20120008702A1 (en) * 2010-07-12 2012-01-12 Industrial Cooperation Foundation Chonbuk National University Method for precoding and decoding distributing mimo channels in relay-based df cooperative wireless networks
US20120014279A1 (en) * 2009-02-24 2012-01-19 Panasonic Corporation Wireless transmission apparatus and precoding method
US20120014424A1 (en) * 2010-07-15 2012-01-19 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Communicating channel state information using predictive vector quantization
US20120020200A1 (en) * 2010-07-20 2012-01-26 Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. Apparatus and method for precoding using channel orthogonalization in multi-user multi-antenna system
US20120020434A1 (en) * 2009-03-16 2012-01-26 Rockstar Bidco Lp Transmission using common and dedicated pilots
US20120045003A1 (en) * 2010-08-23 2012-02-23 Qinghua Li Communication station and method for efficiently providing channel feedback for mimo communications
US8130864B1 (en) * 2007-04-03 2012-03-06 Marvell International Ltd. System and method of beamforming with reduced feedback
US20120076223A1 (en) * 2007-02-12 2012-03-29 Mark Kent Method and System for an Alternating Delta Quantizer for Limited Feedback MIMO Pre-Coders
US8155227B2 (en) * 2005-08-04 2012-04-10 Panasonic Corporation Mobile station apparatus, communication method, and base station apparatus
US20120106668A1 (en) * 2007-02-12 2012-05-03 Mark Kent Method and system for an alternating channel delta quantizer for mimo pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US20120134434A1 (en) * 2009-08-10 2012-05-31 Zte Corporation Method and system for precoding and method for constructing precoding codebook
US20120178374A1 (en) * 2011-01-07 2012-07-12 Zte Corporation METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPATIAL CSI FEEDBACK FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT PROCESSING (CoMP)
US20120190309A1 (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-07-26 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Assisted Open Loop Multiple Input, Multiple Output Communications
US20120276943A1 (en) * 2011-04-26 2012-11-01 Hitachi, Ltd. Wireless communication system, wireless communication method, and base station device
US8306042B1 (en) * 2009-06-19 2012-11-06 Google Inc. Class-based deterministic packet routing
US20120314805A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2012-12-13 Hidekazu Tsuboi Wireless transmitting apparatus, wireless receiving apparatus, wireless communication system, wireless transmitting method and wireless receiving method
US20120328036A1 (en) * 2007-05-21 2012-12-27 Spatial Digital Systems Method And Apparatus for Channel Bonding Using Multiple-Beam Antennas
US20130064274A1 (en) * 2008-07-01 2013-03-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless communication apparatus
US20130121379A1 (en) * 2011-11-10 2013-05-16 Xiao-an Wang Heterogeneous Pilots
US20130207842A1 (en) * 2010-10-21 2013-08-15 Locata Corporation Pty Ltd Method and Apparatus for Forming a Remote Beam
US20130272443A1 (en) * 2012-04-17 2013-10-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus to improve channel estimation in communication systems
US8615052B2 (en) 2010-10-06 2013-12-24 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Enhanced channel feedback for multi-user MIMO
US8675794B1 (en) 2009-10-13 2014-03-18 Marvell International Ltd. Efficient estimation of feedback for modulation and coding scheme (MCS) selection
US8687741B1 (en) 2010-03-29 2014-04-01 Marvell International Ltd. Scoring hypotheses in LTE cell search
US8699633B2 (en) 2009-02-27 2014-04-15 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Systems and methods for communication using dedicated reference signal (DRS)
US8699405B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-15 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US8750404B2 (en) 2010-10-06 2014-06-10 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Codebook subsampling for PUCCH feedback
WO2014116090A1 (en) 2013-01-28 2014-07-31 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmission/reception in radio communication system
US8861391B1 (en) 2011-03-02 2014-10-14 Marvell International Ltd. Channel feedback for TDM scheduling in heterogeneous networks having multiple cell classes
US20140307814A1 (en) * 2013-04-15 2014-10-16 Broadcom Corporation Antenna Systems and Methods for massive MIMO Communication
US8902842B1 (en) 2012-01-11 2014-12-02 Marvell International Ltd Control signaling and resource mapping for coordinated transmission
US20140357310A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2014-12-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink power control for wireless communication
US20140369328A1 (en) * 2013-06-13 2014-12-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for operating analog beam in a beam division multiple access system
US8917796B1 (en) 2009-10-19 2014-12-23 Marvell International Ltd. Transmission-mode-aware rate matching in MIMO signal generation
US8923427B2 (en) 2011-11-07 2014-12-30 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Codebook sub-sampling for frequency-selective precoding feedback
US20150036669A1 (en) * 2006-03-17 2015-02-05 Apple Inc. Closed-Loop MIMO Systems and Methods
US20150043552A1 (en) * 2007-05-02 2015-02-12 Tyco Fire & Security Gmbh Wireless communication system
US9020058B2 (en) 2011-11-07 2015-04-28 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Precoding feedback for cross-polarized antennas based on signal-component magnitude difference
US20150124900A1 (en) * 2010-05-04 2015-05-07 Celeno Communications Ltd. System and method for channel state related feedback in multi-user multiple-input-multiple-output systems
US9031597B2 (en) 2011-11-10 2015-05-12 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Differential CQI encoding for cooperative multipoint feedback
US9048970B1 (en) 2011-01-14 2015-06-02 Marvell International Ltd. Feedback for cooperative multipoint transmission systems
US9088872B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2015-07-21 Intel Corporation Hybrid codebook design for wireless systems
US9124327B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2015-09-01 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Channel feedback for cooperative multipoint transmission
US9136861B1 (en) * 2014-02-26 2015-09-15 Elta Systems Ltd. System and method for enhancing dynamic range of a beamforming multi-channel digital receiver
US9143951B2 (en) 2012-04-27 2015-09-22 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Method and system for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) communication between base-stations and mobile communication terminals
US9220087B1 (en) 2011-12-08 2015-12-22 Marvell International Ltd. Dynamic point selection with combined PUCCH/PUSCH feedback
KR101608708B1 (en) * 2009-10-01 2016-04-04 삼성전자주식회사 Multiple-input multiple-output communication system using differential codebook including unitary matrices
US9331883B1 (en) * 2013-03-05 2016-05-03 Quantenna Communications, Inc. Wireless home network supporting concurrent links to legacy devices
US9386542B2 (en) 2013-09-19 2016-07-05 Google Technology Holdings, LLC Method and apparatus for estimating transmit power of a wireless device
US9402199B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2016-07-26 Netgear, Inc. Systems and methods for wireless load balancing and channel selection for a wireless device using WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US9401750B2 (en) * 2010-05-05 2016-07-26 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and precoder information feedback in multi-antenna wireless communication systems
US9478847B2 (en) 2014-06-02 2016-10-25 Google Technology Holdings LLC Antenna system and method of assembly for a wearable electronic device
US9491007B2 (en) 2014-04-28 2016-11-08 Google Technology Holdings LLC Apparatus and method for antenna matching
US9509391B2 (en) 2010-09-08 2016-11-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding feedback schemes for very high throughput wireless systems
US20170005711A1 (en) * 2011-08-11 2017-01-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for tracking beam in wireless communication system
US9549290B2 (en) 2013-12-19 2017-01-17 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for determining direction information for a wireless device
US9591508B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2017-03-07 Google Technology Holdings LLC Methods and apparatus for transmitting data between different peer-to-peer communication groups
WO2017069510A1 (en) * 2015-10-19 2017-04-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Signal transmitting method, signal receiving method, transmitter and receiver
US20170207941A1 (en) * 2016-01-19 2017-07-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for extending an ofdm waveform for multiplexing
CN107026681A (en) * 2016-02-01 2017-08-08 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Signaling method, method of reseptance, transmitter and receiver
US9755807B2 (en) 2006-03-20 2017-09-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink channel estimation using a signaling channel
US9813262B2 (en) 2012-12-03 2017-11-07 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for selectively transmitting data using spatial diversity
US20170366982A1 (en) * 2007-05-21 2017-12-21 Spatial Digital Systems, Inc. Channel bonding using k-muxing and multiple-beam antenna
US20180041294A1 (en) * 2005-01-21 2018-02-08 Intel Corporation Techniques to manage channel prediction
US9979531B2 (en) 2013-01-03 2018-05-22 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for tuning a communication device for multi band operation
US10200096B2 (en) * 2007-10-15 2019-02-05 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Beamforming using predefined spatial mapping matrices
US10229697B2 (en) 2013-03-12 2019-03-12 Google Technology Holdings LLC Apparatus and method for beamforming to obtain voice and noise signals
US10236958B2 (en) * 2016-03-21 2019-03-19 University Of Science And Technology Of China Method for signal transmission to multiple user equipments utilizing reciprocity of wireless channel
US10284332B2 (en) * 2017-03-03 2019-05-07 Intel IP Corporation Spur cancelation using inverse spur injection
US10305557B2 (en) * 2013-12-20 2019-05-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Codebook for multiple-input multiple-output system and communication method and apparatus using same
US20190181993A1 (en) * 2016-08-12 2019-06-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for performing communication by using non-orthogonal code multiple access scheme in wireless communication system
US20190239233A1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2019-08-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback-driven antenna array size adaptation
US10516452B1 (en) * 2018-06-08 2019-12-24 University Of South Florida Using artificial signals to maximize capacity and secrecy of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication
US10644771B2 (en) * 2018-06-08 2020-05-05 University Of South Florida Using artificial signals to maximize capacity and secrecy of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication
US10727911B2 (en) * 2018-08-20 2020-07-28 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Beamforming in MIMO radio networks
US10965435B2 (en) * 2016-11-16 2021-03-30 Huawei Technologies Duesseldorf Gmbh Techniques for pre- and decoding a multicarrier signal based on a mapping function with respect to inband and out-of-band subcarriers
US11218197B2 (en) * 2017-10-05 2022-01-04 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Convex reduction of amplitudes for OFDM MIMO with multiple carriers
US11451283B2 (en) * 2020-05-21 2022-09-20 Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited Channel smoothing with TX beamforming
US20220393925A1 (en) 2018-10-26 2022-12-08 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Systems and methods for multi-carrier or multi-band low-papr precoding that handle cyclic prefix
US20230216622A1 (en) * 2021-10-22 2023-07-06 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Precoding wireless communications
US11777585B2 (en) * 2021-09-03 2023-10-03 Nec Corporation Wireless receiving apparatus and method thereof

Families Citing this family (156)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
IT1403065B1 (en) 2010-12-01 2013-10-04 Andrew Wireless Systems Gmbh DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM FOR MIMO SIGNALS.
KR101026889B1 (en) * 2004-08-17 2011-04-04 엘지전자 주식회사 Information transmitting method for closed loop stc
KR100725773B1 (en) * 2004-08-20 2007-06-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for adaptively changing the uplink power control scheme depending on the status of mobile station in a wireless mobile communication system using time division duplexing scheme
BRPI0516362A (en) * 2004-10-18 2008-09-02 Lg Electronics Inc method for transmitting feedback information in a mobile communications system by means of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (mdof) / mdof access (amdof)
EP1802017A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2007-06-27 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Link-adaptation system in mimo-ofdm system, and method therefor
KR100909539B1 (en) * 2004-11-09 2009-07-27 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for supporting various multi-antenna technologies in a broadband wireless access system using multiple antennas
US7564831B2 (en) * 2004-12-27 2009-07-21 Lg Electronics, Inc. Method of transmitting feedback information using an extended subheader
KR101073909B1 (en) * 2005-03-04 2011-10-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of MIMO mode feedback in broadband wireless access system
KR100922959B1 (en) * 2005-03-29 2009-10-22 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for scheduling resource in a multi antena system
EP1722583A1 (en) * 2005-05-11 2006-11-15 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Beam-hopping in a radio communication system
WO2007022630A1 (en) * 2005-08-23 2007-03-01 Nortel Networks Limited Methods and systems for ofdm multiple zone partitioning
EP1929684A4 (en) 2005-08-23 2010-05-19 Nortel Networks Ltd Adaptive two-dimensional channel interpolation
EP1956786A3 (en) 2005-09-30 2010-05-12 Nortel Networks Limited Initial access channel for scalable wireless mobile communication network
US7680125B2 (en) * 2005-10-19 2010-03-16 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Scheduling packet data transmissions in a packet data network based on early decoded channel feedback reports
PL1941647T3 (en) 2005-10-27 2013-10-31 Qualcomm Inc Precoding for segment sensitive scheduling in wireless communication systems
US7917176B2 (en) * 2006-02-14 2011-03-29 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Structured codebook and successive beamforming for multiple-antenna systems
US7796717B2 (en) * 2005-11-02 2010-09-14 Magnolia Brandband Inc. Modifying a signal according to a diversity parameter adjustment
US9042293B2 (en) * 2005-12-13 2015-05-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Communication method using relay station in mobile communication system
US20070149132A1 (en) 2005-12-22 2007-06-28 Junyl Li Methods and apparatus related to selecting control channel reporting formats
US9125092B2 (en) 2005-12-22 2015-09-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus for reporting and/or using control information
US9338767B2 (en) 2005-12-22 2016-05-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus of implementing and/or using a dedicated control channel
WO2007078165A1 (en) 2006-01-05 2007-07-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting information in mobile communications system
KR100912784B1 (en) 2006-01-05 2009-08-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Data transmission method and data retransmission method
KR101319870B1 (en) * 2006-01-05 2013-10-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for handover in mobile communication system
KR101333918B1 (en) 2006-01-05 2013-11-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Point-to-multipoint service communication of mobile communication system
KR101203841B1 (en) * 2006-01-05 2012-11-21 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of transmitting and receiving paging message in wireless communication system
US9456455B2 (en) * 2006-01-05 2016-09-27 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting feedback information in a wireless communication system
KR101211807B1 (en) 2006-01-05 2012-12-12 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for managing synchronization state for mobile terminal in mobile communication system
WO2007078156A2 (en) 2006-01-05 2007-07-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting data in a mobile communication system
KR101265628B1 (en) 2006-01-05 2013-05-22 엘지전자 주식회사 method for scheduling radio resourse in the mobile communication system
KR101187076B1 (en) 2006-01-05 2012-09-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting signals in the moblie communication system
JP4806030B2 (en) 2006-01-05 2011-11-02 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド Method for transferring signals in a mobile communication system
US7606574B2 (en) * 2006-01-12 2009-10-20 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for implementing spatial division multiple access (“SDMA”) to communicate user data and backhaul data with the same wireless time-frequency resources
KR100934656B1 (en) 2006-02-06 2009-12-31 엘지전자 주식회사 Radio Resource Allocation Method in Multi-Carrier System
KR101358469B1 (en) 2006-02-07 2014-02-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for selection and signaling of downlink and uplink bandwidth in wireless networks
KR101216751B1 (en) * 2006-02-07 2012-12-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for avoiding collision using identifier in mobile network
KR100819285B1 (en) 2006-03-16 2008-04-02 삼성전자주식회사 Method for transmiting/receiving feedback information in a multi-antenna system of selporting multi-user and system thereof
US8045992B2 (en) * 2006-03-20 2011-10-25 Intel Corporation Uplink and downlink control signaling in wireless networks
KR101387475B1 (en) * 2006-03-22 2014-04-22 엘지전자 주식회사 method of processing data in mobile communication system having a plurality of network entities
CN101064557B (en) * 2006-04-25 2012-10-17 上海原动力通信科技有限公司 Method for obtaining downlink channel quality information based on intelligent antenna
US7729703B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2010-06-01 Motorola, Inc. Apparatus and method for reporting a channel quality indication to non-serving cells
WO2007132313A2 (en) * 2006-05-12 2007-11-22 Nokia Corporation Feedback frame structure for subspace tracking precoding
US8116391B2 (en) 2006-05-26 2012-02-14 Wi-Lan Inc. Quantization of channel state information in multiple antenna systems
JP4189410B2 (en) * 2006-06-12 2008-12-03 株式会社東芝 Wireless communication apparatus and transmission control method
WO2007148935A1 (en) 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting and receiving radio access information using a message separation in a wireless mobile communications system
KR20070121505A (en) 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for reconfiguring radio link
KR20070121513A (en) 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Uplink access method of mobile communication system
EP2618517B1 (en) 2006-06-21 2023-08-02 LG Electronics Inc. Method of supporting data retransmission in a mobile communication system
KR101369135B1 (en) 2006-06-21 2014-03-05 엘지전자 주식회사 Mehtod for supproting quality of multimeida broadcast multicast service(mbms) in mobile communications system and terminal thereof
KR20080004701A (en) * 2006-07-06 2008-01-10 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for channel feedback in wireless communication system
EP3554171B1 (en) * 2006-07-07 2021-09-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for reducing volume of resource allocation information message in a broadband wireless communication system
CN101114868B (en) * 2006-07-25 2011-11-23 电信科学技术研究院 Feedback channel distribution indicating method and system
KR101358424B1 (en) * 2006-08-10 2014-02-17 삼성전자주식회사 Methode and apparatus for transmitting feedback information
KR101358990B1 (en) * 2006-08-10 2014-02-17 삼성전자주식회사 Methode and apparatus for transmitting feedback information
WO2008018710A2 (en) * 2006-08-10 2008-02-14 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for transmitting feedback information
US8459567B2 (en) 2006-08-17 2013-06-11 Direct Measurements, Inc. Non-linear strain gage incorporating a nested binary code symbol
WO2008021458A2 (en) 2006-08-17 2008-02-21 Gregory Hovis Two dimensional bar code having increased accuracy
EP2854304B1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2016-02-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback of precoding control indication (PCI) and channel quality indication (CQI) in a wireless communication system
WO2008031037A2 (en) 2006-09-07 2008-03-13 Texas Instruments Incorporated Antenna grouping for mimo systems
US8611259B2 (en) 2006-09-08 2013-12-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and system for providing channel state information feedback in a wireless communication system
JP4940867B2 (en) * 2006-09-29 2012-05-30 日本電気株式会社 Multiplexing method of control signal and reference signal, resource allocation method and base station in mobile communication system
US7747225B2 (en) * 2006-10-03 2010-06-29 Motorola, Inc. Mobile assisted downlink beamforming with antenna weight feedback
CN101166047B (en) * 2006-10-17 2011-11-30 中国科学院上海微系统与信息技术研究所 Multi-antenna communication system transmitting device for channel geometric mean decomposition, receiving device, transmitting method and receiving method
WO2008051153A2 (en) * 2006-10-27 2008-05-02 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and arrangement for allocating radio resources in a communication system
JP2010508786A (en) * 2006-10-31 2010-03-18 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッド Reliable uplink resource request
ES2393407T3 (en) 2006-12-27 2012-12-21 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Link adaptation in a wireless telecommunications system
US8606287B2 (en) * 2007-01-09 2013-12-10 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for controlling and regulating services and resources in high-performance downlink channels
KR101431271B1 (en) * 2007-01-12 2014-08-20 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for feedback information transmitting/receiving in mobile telecommunication using multiple input multiple output
US7995642B2 (en) 2007-02-05 2011-08-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Precoding signaling in a MIMO wireless communication system
CN101242245B (en) * 2007-02-06 2012-09-05 华为技术有限公司 A method and device for processing response message
KR101359666B1 (en) 2007-02-06 2014-02-10 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for codebook based cooperative beamformaing in boradband wireless access communication system
BRPI0721210B1 (en) 2007-02-09 2020-01-07 Telecom Italia S.P.A. Method to characterize interference in a radio communication system, radio communication system, memory, and, method to mitigate interference in a radio communication system
NZ578806A (en) 2007-03-19 2012-05-25 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M Using an uplink grant as trigger of first or second type of cqi report
TW200901655A (en) * 2007-03-21 2009-01-01 Interdigital Tech Corp Method and apparatus for communicating precoding or beamforming information to users in MIMO wireless communication systems
EP2140573B1 (en) * 2007-04-30 2018-07-04 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Recommending a transmission mode for a mimo -supporting ue
US8325852B2 (en) * 2007-06-08 2012-12-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. CDD precoding for open loop SU MIMO
US8675743B2 (en) 2007-08-03 2014-03-18 Apple Inc. Feedback scheduling to reduce feedback rates in MIMO systems
CN101369874B (en) * 2007-08-17 2013-04-24 华为技术有限公司 Multi-user feedback method, system, base station and customer equipment
ITMI20071713A1 (en) * 2007-08-31 2009-03-01 Baccio Baccetti POINT-POINT RADIO SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE FUNCTIONING OF THIS SYSTEM.
US8009778B2 (en) 2007-09-07 2011-08-30 Tr Technologies Inc. Quantized channel state information prediction in multiple antenna systems
US8036282B2 (en) 2007-09-07 2011-10-11 Wi-Lan Inc. Multi-tiered quantization of channel state information in multiple antenna systems
CN101861704A (en) * 2007-09-19 2010-10-13 新加坡科技研究局 A method of transmitting data to a receiver
EP2395776B1 (en) 2007-09-26 2015-06-10 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Wireless communication system, base station apparatus and mobile station apparatus for sending feedback information
EP2218206B1 (en) * 2007-11-02 2019-01-02 Nokia Solutions and Networks Oy Method and apparatus for pilot pattern allocation
KR101427420B1 (en) 2007-11-28 2014-09-29 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparaus for transmission in a multiple input multiple output comunication system
US20090154457A1 (en) * 2007-12-18 2009-06-18 Abhijeet Kolekar Enhancing reliability of multicasting and broadcasting services (mbs) over broad band wireless access (bwa) networks
US8917598B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2014-12-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Downlink flow control
US8254359B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-08-28 Intel Corporation Recursive reduction of channel state feedback
EP2362567A2 (en) * 2008-01-24 2011-08-31 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson AB (Publ) HS-SCCH orders for CQI mode selection
KR101369340B1 (en) * 2008-01-25 2014-03-26 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for allocating feedback channel in multipe antenna communication system
US8699487B2 (en) * 2008-02-04 2014-04-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink delay budget feedback
US8656239B2 (en) 2008-02-12 2014-02-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Control of data transmission based on HARQ in a wireless communication system
WO2009102264A2 (en) 2008-02-14 2009-08-20 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Methods and arrangements in a mobile telecommunication system
US8184579B2 (en) * 2008-02-15 2012-05-22 Texas Instruments Incorporated ACK/NAK repetition schemes in wireless networks
US7978623B1 (en) 2008-03-22 2011-07-12 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. Channel rank updates in multiple-input multiple-output communication systems
KR101537591B1 (en) * 2008-04-07 2015-07-20 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for mode adaptation in MIMO system
US8234546B2 (en) 2008-04-21 2012-07-31 Wi-Lan, Inc. Mitigation of transmission errors of quantized channel state information feedback in multi antenna systems
WO2009136729A2 (en) * 2008-05-06 2009-11-12 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method of transmiting control information and terminal thereof
KR101585158B1 (en) 2008-05-06 2016-01-25 한국전자통신연구원 Method of transmit control information and Terminal thereof
EP2134019B1 (en) * 2008-06-13 2013-07-31 Fujitsu Limited Wireless communication systems
KR101700184B1 (en) 2008-07-01 2017-02-13 엘지전자 주식회사 Permutation device and method having improved resource granularity for wireless communications
US20110122811A1 (en) * 2008-07-07 2011-05-26 Nortel Networks Limited Codebook restructure, differential encoding/decoding and scheduling
KR101470501B1 (en) * 2008-08-20 2014-12-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting data based on quantized channel state information
US8791470B2 (en) * 2009-10-05 2014-07-29 Zena Technologies, Inc. Nano structured LEDs
JP2012502064A (en) 2008-09-10 2012-01-26 エジソン ファーマシューティカルズ, インコーポレイテッド Treatment of pervasive developmental disorders with redox-active therapeutic agents
WO2010090457A2 (en) * 2009-02-05 2010-08-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus of transmitting feedback message in wireless communication system
KR101551496B1 (en) * 2009-02-05 2015-09-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of transmitting feedback message in wirless communication system
EP2410784B2 (en) * 2009-03-20 2017-02-15 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Pre-coding control indication information receiving and feedback method, and the communication device thereof
KR101636258B1 (en) 2009-03-20 2016-07-05 삼성전자 주식회사 An automatic optimization of RACH related system resource in a wireless system
WO2010123215A2 (en) * 2009-04-24 2010-10-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for releasing uplink radio resource in wireless communication system
KR101643258B1 (en) 2009-05-18 2016-07-27 삼성전자 주식회사 Method for allocating resource block in long term evolution system
KR101534865B1 (en) * 2009-06-23 2015-07-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of performing link adaptation procedure
CN101959161B (en) * 2009-07-16 2014-12-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for sending and receiving uplink fixed resource allocation signaling
US9112741B2 (en) * 2009-09-18 2015-08-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Protocol to support adaptive station-dependent channel state information feedback rate in multi-user communication systems
US8594051B2 (en) * 2009-09-18 2013-11-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Protocol to support adaptive station-dependent channel state information feedback rate in multi-user communication systems
JP5788391B2 (en) * 2009-10-05 2015-09-30 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エル エム エリクソン(パブル) Uplink transmit diversity
US8605748B2 (en) * 2009-12-08 2013-12-10 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Communication method
US9379867B2 (en) * 2009-12-30 2016-06-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for efficiently operating fast feedback channel in wireless communication system
KR20110115488A (en) * 2010-04-15 2011-10-21 주식회사 팬택 Method and appratatus for resource allocation in wireless communication system
US20110255483A1 (en) * 2010-04-16 2011-10-20 Research In Motion Limited Signaling of Precoding Granularity for LTE and LTE-A
KR101618127B1 (en) * 2010-04-22 2016-05-04 엘지전자 주식회사 method AND APPARATUS of transmitting and receiving signal in distributed antenna system
EP2622757B1 (en) 2010-10-01 2018-11-07 CommScope Technologies LLC Distributed antenna system for mimo signals
US9118364B2 (en) * 2010-10-06 2015-08-25 Broadcom Corporation Differential feedback within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications
WO2013015639A2 (en) * 2011-07-28 2013-01-31 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for position update in m2m communication, and apparatus using same
US20130051386A1 (en) * 2011-08-24 2013-02-28 Renesas Mobile Corporation Methods and Apparatus for Multicast Transmission
GB2482991B (en) * 2011-08-24 2012-09-12 Renesas Mobile Corp Methods and apparatus for multicast transmission
CN103023621B (en) * 2011-09-23 2016-03-09 华为技术有限公司 The method of transmission information, subscriber equipment and base station
US9350503B2 (en) * 2011-11-02 2016-05-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transceiving preamble in wireless access system and apparatus for same
CN103220077A (en) * 2012-01-21 2013-07-24 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission and receiving method, base station and user equipment
CN103621168B (en) * 2012-06-28 2017-05-10 华为技术有限公司 Downlink-data feedback information transmission method, terminal, and base station
CN103516656B (en) * 2012-06-29 2018-03-27 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Inverse fast fourier transform implementation method and device
US9544095B2 (en) * 2012-11-05 2017-01-10 Broadcom Corporation Channel estimation for phase-only feedback and methods for use therewith
DE102013222328B4 (en) * 2012-11-05 2020-02-20 Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Ltd. Channel estimation for pure phase feedback and methods for use with it
CN104168050B (en) * 2013-05-16 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 The method and apparatus of feedback of channel information
WO2015035611A1 (en) * 2013-09-13 2015-03-19 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for sending feedback information
CN104168650A (en) * 2014-09-03 2014-11-26 广州市香港科大霍英东研究院 Indoor positioning method based on dynamic wireless access points
US10135508B2 (en) * 2014-10-13 2018-11-20 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for generating common signal in multiple input multiple output system
US10868650B2 (en) * 2015-05-27 2020-12-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Pilot reconfiguration and retransmission in wireless networks
RU2683795C1 (en) * 2015-07-29 2019-04-02 Хуавей Текнолоджиз Ко., Лтд. Device and method for transmitting information feedback and device and method for receiving information feedback
EP3188427B1 (en) * 2015-12-28 2019-08-21 Institut Mines-Télécom Reordered sub-block decoding
US10448053B2 (en) * 2016-02-15 2019-10-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-pass non-separable transforms for video coding
US10390048B2 (en) 2016-02-15 2019-08-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Efficient transform coding using optimized compact multi-pass transforms
US10349085B2 (en) 2016-02-15 2019-07-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Efficient parameter storage for compact multi-pass transforms
EP3419190A4 (en) 2016-03-10 2019-01-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Transmission diversity method, device and system
RU2769962C2 (en) * 2016-06-03 2022-04-11 Панасоник Интеллекчуал Проперти Корпорэйшн оф Америка Transmission device and transmission method
CN107733492B (en) * 2016-08-10 2020-09-04 华为技术有限公司 Data transmitting and receiving method and device
CN107733592B (en) 2016-08-10 2020-11-27 华为技术有限公司 Transmission scheme indication method, data transmission method, device and system
CN107770876A (en) * 2016-08-19 2018-03-06 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Resource determining method, base station and mobile station
US9893775B1 (en) * 2016-12-12 2018-02-13 Sprint Spectrum L.P. Systems and methods for implementing an enhanced multi-antenna transmission scheme
TWI618374B (en) * 2017-04-21 2018-03-11 國立臺灣大學 Methods of beam-indexed spatial modulation
US10009832B1 (en) 2017-08-11 2018-06-26 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Facilitating compact signaling design for reserved resource configuration in wireless communication systems
CN110366247B (en) * 2018-03-26 2021-07-27 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
JP7205393B2 (en) * 2019-06-05 2023-01-17 日本電信電話株式会社 Wireless communication system, wireless communication method and wireless communication device
CN112866125B (en) * 2019-11-26 2023-01-06 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Downlink data transmission method and device
KR20210074872A (en) * 2019-12-12 2021-06-22 삼성전자주식회사 Wireless communication appartus for low complexity beamforming feedback and method of operation thereof
US11888552B1 (en) 2022-09-06 2024-01-30 Apple Inc. Imbalance compensation for uplink (UL)—multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) transmissions

Citations (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5677909A (en) * 1994-05-11 1997-10-14 Spectrix Corporation Apparatus for exchanging data between a central station and a plurality of wireless remote stations on a time divided commnication channel
US20010050964A1 (en) * 1998-04-15 2001-12-13 Foschini Gerard Joseph Wireless communications system having a space-time architecture employing multi-element antennas at both the transmitter and receiver
US20020122383A1 (en) * 2000-09-01 2002-09-05 Shiquan Wu Adaptive time diversity and spatial diversity for OFDM
US6477161B1 (en) * 1998-12-21 2002-11-05 Nortel Networks Limited Downlink beamforming approach for frequency division duplex cellular systems
US20030162511A1 (en) * 2002-02-26 2003-08-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving status information of forward channel in a mobile communication system supporting selective transmit diversity
US20030181170A1 (en) * 2002-03-21 2003-09-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for transmitting signal in mobile communication system
US20030218973A1 (en) * 2002-05-24 2003-11-27 Oprea Alexandru M. System and method for data detection in wireless communication systems
US20030228850A1 (en) * 2002-06-07 2003-12-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmit diversity apparatus for mobile communication system and method thereof
US20040013102A1 (en) * 2001-06-27 2004-01-22 Mo-Han Fong Mapping information in wireless communications systems
US6747959B1 (en) * 1998-10-07 2004-06-08 At&T Corp. Voice data integrated mulitaccess by self-reservation and blocked binary tree resolution
US20040131025A1 (en) * 2001-06-28 2004-07-08 Mischa Dohler Electronic data communication systems
US20040146018A1 (en) * 2002-10-25 2004-07-29 Walton J. Rodney Multi-mode terminal in a wireless MIMO system
US20040203991A1 (en) * 2002-02-07 2004-10-14 Tao Chen Power control of serving and non-serving base stations
US20050048933A1 (en) * 2003-08-25 2005-03-03 Jingxian Wu Adaptive transmit diversity with quadrant phase constraining feedback
US20050078763A1 (en) * 2003-10-08 2005-04-14 Won-Joon Choi Apparatus and method of multiple antenna transmitter beamforming of high data rate wideband packetized wireless communication signals
US20050085230A1 (en) * 2003-10-16 2005-04-21 Motorola, Inc. Circuit and method for producing a pilot strength measurement message
US20050129068A1 (en) * 2003-12-15 2005-06-16 Boris Ginzburg Method, apparatus and system of multiple-input-multiple-output wireless communication
US20050135295A1 (en) * 2003-10-15 2005-06-23 Walton Jay R. High speed media access control and direct link protocol
US6975611B1 (en) * 1999-03-03 2005-12-13 Lucent Technologies Inc. Method and device for MAC layer feedback in a packet communication system
US20090257395A1 (en) * 2005-03-12 2009-10-15 Yong-Suk Jin Cqich allocation request header for communicating feedback information
US7684762B2 (en) * 2004-10-18 2010-03-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting feedback information in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)/OFDM access (OFDMA) mobile communication system

Family Cites Families (41)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2636466B1 (en) 1988-09-15 1992-01-17 Cezus Co Europ Zirconium METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING A NEUTRON ABSORBING PELLET, PELLET OBTAINED AND USE THEREOF
EP1357689B1 (en) 1995-02-23 2005-10-12 NTT DoCoMo, Inc. Variable rate transmission method and transmitter using the same
US7412072B2 (en) * 1996-05-16 2008-08-12 Digimarc Corporation Variable message coding protocols for encoding auxiliary data in media signals
US6259730B1 (en) 1998-11-10 2001-07-10 Lucent Technologies, Inc. Transmit diversity and reception equalization for radio links
CA2299568A1 (en) 1999-03-11 2000-09-11 Lucent Technologies Inc. Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing based spread spectrum multiple access system using directional antenna
CN1196277C (en) * 1999-05-19 2005-04-06 诺基亚网络有限公司 Transmit diversity method and system
US20010033622A1 (en) 2000-03-14 2001-10-25 Joengren George Robust utilization of feedback information in space-time coding
US6473467B1 (en) 2000-03-22 2002-10-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for measuring reporting channel state information in a high efficiency, high performance communications system
US7248841B2 (en) * 2000-06-13 2007-07-24 Agee Brian G Method and apparatus for optimization of wireless multipoint electromagnetic communication networks
EP1170897B1 (en) 2000-07-05 2020-01-15 Wi-Fi One Technologies International Limited Pilot pattern design for a STTD scheme in an OFDM system
US6850481B2 (en) 2000-09-01 2005-02-01 Nortel Networks Limited Channels estimation for multiple input—multiple output, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system
US7233625B2 (en) 2000-09-01 2007-06-19 Nortel Networks Limited Preamble design for multiple input—multiple output (MIMO), orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system
CN100407612C (en) 2000-11-22 2008-07-30 北方电讯网络有限公司 Method and device for turbo space-time trellis coding
US6917820B2 (en) * 2001-01-26 2005-07-12 Stanford University Method and apparatus for selection and use of optimal antennas in wireless systems
US6865373B2 (en) 2001-05-21 2005-03-08 Nortel Networks Limited Apparatus and method for encoding and decoding data within wireless networks
WO2003010984A1 (en) * 2001-06-27 2003-02-06 Nortel Networks Limited Communication of control information in wireless communication systems
US6441786B1 (en) 2001-07-20 2002-08-27 Motorola, Inc. Adaptive antenna array and method for control thereof
KR100703295B1 (en) 2001-08-18 2007-04-03 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for transporting and receiving data using antenna array in mobile system
US7548506B2 (en) 2001-10-17 2009-06-16 Nortel Networks Limited System access and synchronization methods for MIMO OFDM communications systems and physical layer packet and preamble design
US7773699B2 (en) * 2001-10-17 2010-08-10 Nortel Networks Limited Method and apparatus for channel quality measurements
US7248559B2 (en) 2001-10-17 2007-07-24 Nortel Networks Limited Scattered pilot pattern and channel estimation method for MIMO-OFDM systems
US7154936B2 (en) * 2001-12-03 2006-12-26 Qualcomm, Incorporated Iterative detection and decoding for a MIMO-OFDM system
WO2003049353A1 (en) 2001-12-05 2003-06-12 Qualcomm, Incorporated System and method for adjusting quality of service in a communication system
US6862271B2 (en) 2002-02-26 2005-03-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) systems with multiple transmission modes
GB2386519B (en) 2002-03-12 2004-05-26 Toshiba Res Europ Ltd Adaptive Multicarrier Communication
JP3885657B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2007-02-21 Kddi株式会社 Receiver for correcting frequency error of OFDM signal
KR100498326B1 (en) 2002-06-18 2005-07-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Adaptive modulation coding apparatus and method for mobile communication device
US7436757B1 (en) * 2002-06-21 2008-10-14 Nortel Networks Limited Scattered pilot and filtering for channel estimation
US7095709B2 (en) 2002-06-24 2006-08-22 Qualcomm, Incorporated Diversity transmission modes for MIMO OFDM communication systems
US6987952B2 (en) * 2002-09-30 2006-01-17 Nokia Corporation Apparatus, and associated method, for effectuating transmit diversity in a communication system
US8320301B2 (en) * 2002-10-25 2012-11-27 Qualcomm Incorporated MIMO WLAN system
US20040152458A1 (en) * 2003-01-30 2004-08-05 Ari Hottinen Data transfer method in mobile communication system and mobile communication system
US7095790B2 (en) 2003-02-25 2006-08-22 Qualcomm, Incorporated Transmission schemes for multi-antenna communication systems utilizing multi-carrier modulation
US7640373B2 (en) 2003-04-25 2009-12-29 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for channel quality feedback within a communication system
WO2004105337A1 (en) * 2003-05-16 2004-12-02 Thomson Licensing S.A. Repetition coding in a satellite-based communications system
CN1567764B (en) 2003-06-23 2010-05-12 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 New sub-channel generating and allocating method of multi-user OFDMA system
WO2005060132A1 (en) 2003-12-18 2005-06-30 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for requesting and reporting channel quality information in mobile communication system
CN106160830B (en) * 2004-03-15 2020-02-14 苹果公司 Pilot design for OFDM system with four transmit antennas
US7630356B2 (en) * 2004-04-05 2009-12-08 Nortel Networks Limited Methods for supporting MIMO transmission in OFDM applications
KR20120060893A (en) * 2004-06-07 2012-06-12 노오텔 네트웍스 리미티드 Handoffs and handoff selection in a wireless access network
US8194781B2 (en) * 2006-12-29 2012-06-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving control channel message in a MIMO mobile communication system

Patent Citations (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5677909A (en) * 1994-05-11 1997-10-14 Spectrix Corporation Apparatus for exchanging data between a central station and a plurality of wireless remote stations on a time divided commnication channel
US20010050964A1 (en) * 1998-04-15 2001-12-13 Foschini Gerard Joseph Wireless communications system having a space-time architecture employing multi-element antennas at both the transmitter and receiver
US6747959B1 (en) * 1998-10-07 2004-06-08 At&T Corp. Voice data integrated mulitaccess by self-reservation and blocked binary tree resolution
US6477161B1 (en) * 1998-12-21 2002-11-05 Nortel Networks Limited Downlink beamforming approach for frequency division duplex cellular systems
US6975611B1 (en) * 1999-03-03 2005-12-13 Lucent Technologies Inc. Method and device for MAC layer feedback in a packet communication system
US20020122383A1 (en) * 2000-09-01 2002-09-05 Shiquan Wu Adaptive time diversity and spatial diversity for OFDM
US20040013102A1 (en) * 2001-06-27 2004-01-22 Mo-Han Fong Mapping information in wireless communications systems
US20040131025A1 (en) * 2001-06-28 2004-07-08 Mischa Dohler Electronic data communication systems
US20040203991A1 (en) * 2002-02-07 2004-10-14 Tao Chen Power control of serving and non-serving base stations
US20030162511A1 (en) * 2002-02-26 2003-08-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving status information of forward channel in a mobile communication system supporting selective transmit diversity
US20030181170A1 (en) * 2002-03-21 2003-09-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for transmitting signal in mobile communication system
US20030218973A1 (en) * 2002-05-24 2003-11-27 Oprea Alexandru M. System and method for data detection in wireless communication systems
US20030228850A1 (en) * 2002-06-07 2003-12-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmit diversity apparatus for mobile communication system and method thereof
US20040146018A1 (en) * 2002-10-25 2004-07-29 Walton J. Rodney Multi-mode terminal in a wireless MIMO system
US20050048933A1 (en) * 2003-08-25 2005-03-03 Jingxian Wu Adaptive transmit diversity with quadrant phase constraining feedback
US20050078763A1 (en) * 2003-10-08 2005-04-14 Won-Joon Choi Apparatus and method of multiple antenna transmitter beamforming of high data rate wideband packetized wireless communication signals
US20050135295A1 (en) * 2003-10-15 2005-06-23 Walton Jay R. High speed media access control and direct link protocol
US20050085230A1 (en) * 2003-10-16 2005-04-21 Motorola, Inc. Circuit and method for producing a pilot strength measurement message
US20050129068A1 (en) * 2003-12-15 2005-06-16 Boris Ginzburg Method, apparatus and system of multiple-input-multiple-output wireless communication
US7684762B2 (en) * 2004-10-18 2010-03-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting feedback information in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)/OFDM access (OFDMA) mobile communication system
US20090257395A1 (en) * 2005-03-12 2009-10-15 Yong-Suk Jin Cqich allocation request header for communicating feedback information

Cited By (478)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120288024A1 (en) * 2004-02-19 2012-11-15 Broadcom Corporation Asymmetrical mimo wireless communications
US8437362B2 (en) * 2004-02-19 2013-05-07 Broadcom Corporation Asymmetrical MIMO wireless communications
US8254407B2 (en) * 2004-02-19 2012-08-28 Broadcom Corporation Asymmetrical MIMO wireless communications
US20100220804A1 (en) * 2004-02-19 2010-09-02 Broadcom Corporation Asymmetrical mimo wireless communications
US7944987B1 (en) 2004-06-17 2011-05-17 Marvell International Ltd. MIMO equalizer design: an algorithmic perspective
US7616695B1 (en) 2004-06-17 2009-11-10 Marvell International Ltd. MIMO equalizer design: an algorithmic perspective
US20060008021A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-12 Nokia Corporation Reduction of self-interference for a high symbol rate non-orthogonal matrix modulation
US20060039494A1 (en) * 2004-07-13 2006-02-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for beamforming in a multi-antenna system
US7675988B2 (en) * 2004-07-13 2010-03-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for beamforming in a multi-antenna system
US8023589B2 (en) * 2004-08-09 2011-09-20 Texas Instruments Incorporated Wireless MIMO transmitter with antenna and tone precoding blocks
US9197300B2 (en) 2004-08-09 2015-11-24 Texas Instruments Incorporated Wireless precoding methods
US8693575B2 (en) 2004-08-09 2014-04-08 Texas Instruments Incorporated Wireless precoding methods
US20060029157A1 (en) * 2004-08-09 2006-02-09 Texas Instruments Incorporated Wireless precoding methods
US8289863B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2012-10-16 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US20090196164A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2009-08-06 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US9054924B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2015-06-09 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US20080273494A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2008-11-06 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US8532210B2 (en) * 2004-08-12 2013-09-10 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US20090129499A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2009-05-21 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US8059555B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2011-11-15 Motorola Mobility, Inc. Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US20060035643A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2006-02-16 Vook Frederick W Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US10630427B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2020-04-21 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US8059556B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2011-11-15 Motorola Mobility, Inc. Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US8509112B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2013-08-13 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US9887808B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2018-02-06 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US20080267271A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2008-10-30 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US7773535B2 (en) * 2004-08-12 2010-08-10 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for closed loop transmission
US9306702B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2016-04-05 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US9608772B2 (en) 2004-08-12 2017-03-28 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US20060039499A1 (en) * 2004-08-17 2006-02-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for space-time block coding
US20100232527A1 (en) * 2004-09-10 2010-09-16 Qinghua Li Interpolation in channel state feedback
US8165241B2 (en) 2004-09-10 2012-04-24 Intel Corporation Closed loop feedback in MIMO systems
US7961802B2 (en) * 2004-09-10 2011-06-14 Intel Corporation Interpolation in channel state feedback
US20090147881A1 (en) * 2004-09-10 2009-06-11 Lin Xintian E Closed loop feedback in mimo systems
US7609780B2 (en) * 2004-09-30 2009-10-27 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for performing sequential closed loop multiple input multiple output (MIMO)
US7796703B2 (en) * 2004-09-30 2010-09-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of processing received signals in a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) system
US20100046665A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2010-02-25 Sadowsky John S Method and apparatus for performing sequential closed loop multiple input multiple output (MIMO)
US20070280360A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2007-12-06 Ihm Bin C Method of Processing Received Signals in a Multi-Input Multi-Output (Mimo) System
US20060071807A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-06 Sadowsky John S Method and apparatus for performing sequential closed loop MIMO
US8204145B2 (en) 2004-09-30 2012-06-19 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for performing sequential closed loop multiple input multiple output (MIMO)
US20060098754A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-05-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Beam and power allocation method for MIMO communication system
US20060104382A1 (en) * 2004-10-27 2006-05-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving signals in multiple input multiple output wireless communication system employing beam forming scheme
US7711330B2 (en) * 2004-10-27 2010-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving signals in multiple input multiple output wireless communication system employing beam forming scheme
US7822132B2 (en) * 2004-11-02 2010-10-26 Nec Corporation OFDM communication system
US20080152028A1 (en) * 2004-11-02 2008-06-26 Nec Corporation Ofdm Communication System
US20060093060A1 (en) * 2004-11-02 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd MIMO system and method
US20070291638A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2007-12-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data using space-time block coding
US20060093062A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data using space-time block coding
US20060093061A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data using space-time block coding
US20060093066A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2006-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for space-time-frequency block coding
US20080260053A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2008-10-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data using space-time block coding
US20060120470A1 (en) * 2004-11-15 2006-06-08 In-Seok Hwang System for communicating channel quality information
US20060120478A1 (en) * 2004-11-15 2006-06-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a multiple-input multiple-output communication system
US7613244B2 (en) * 2004-11-15 2009-11-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System for communicating channel quality information
US7746947B2 (en) * 2004-11-15 2010-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a multiple-input multiple-output communication system
US20060107167A1 (en) * 2004-11-16 2006-05-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiple antenna communication system using automatic repeat request error correction scheme
US20080075181A1 (en) * 2004-12-09 2008-03-27 Zte Corporation Pilot Allocation Method and Device of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing System
US7885345B2 (en) * 2004-12-09 2011-02-08 Zte Corporation Pilot allocation method and device of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing system
US8265012B2 (en) * 2004-12-30 2012-09-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Adaptive subchannel and bit allocation method using partial channel information feedback in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system
US20060146856A1 (en) * 2004-12-30 2006-07-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Adaptive subchannel and bit allocation method using partial channel information feedback in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system
US20060153312A1 (en) * 2005-01-07 2006-07-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for space-time frequency block coding in a wireless communication system
US10389415B2 (en) * 2005-01-13 2019-08-20 Intel Corporation Codebook generation system and associated methods
US8682656B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2014-03-25 Intel Corporation Techniques to generate a precoding matrix for a wireless system
US20130058204A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2013-03-07 Xintian E. Lin Codebook generation system and associated methods
US20130033977A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2013-02-07 Lin Xintian E Codebook generation system and associated methods
US20100157921A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2010-06-24 Lin Xintian E Codebook generation system and associated methods
US20130202056A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2013-08-08 Xintian E. Lin Codebook generation system and associated methods
US10396868B2 (en) * 2005-01-13 2019-08-27 Intel Corporation Codebook generation system and associated methods
US20130195099A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2013-08-01 Xintian E. Lin Codebook generation system and associated methods
US10056996B2 (en) * 2005-01-21 2018-08-21 Intel Corporation Techniques to manage channel prediction
US20180041294A1 (en) * 2005-01-21 2018-02-08 Intel Corporation Techniques to manage channel prediction
US20060171482A1 (en) * 2005-01-28 2006-08-03 Trachewsky Jason A Initiation of a MIMO communication
US8068550B2 (en) * 2005-01-28 2011-11-29 Broadcom Corporation Initiation of a MIMO communication
US20060205412A1 (en) * 2005-03-09 2006-09-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System and method for controlling resource allocation in a multicell communication system
US7978759B1 (en) 2005-03-24 2011-07-12 Marvell International Ltd. Scalable equalizer for multiple-in-multiple-out (MIMO) wireless transmission
US8204103B1 (en) * 2005-03-24 2012-06-19 Marvell International Ltd. Scalable equalizer for multiple-in-multiple-out (MIMO) wireless transmission
US20090147748A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2009-06-11 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Transmission apparatus, reception apparatus, mobile communications system and transmission control method
US20080285686A1 (en) * 2005-07-29 2008-11-20 Norman Beaulieu Antenna Selection Apparatus and Methods
US20070032199A1 (en) * 2005-08-02 2007-02-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for receiving channel quality information in a mobile communication system
US7978798B2 (en) * 2005-08-04 2011-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Spatial multiplexing detection apparatus and method in MIMO system
US8155227B2 (en) * 2005-08-04 2012-04-10 Panasonic Corporation Mobile station apparatus, communication method, and base station apparatus
US20070032206A1 (en) * 2005-08-04 2007-02-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Spatial multiplexing detection apparatus and method in MIMO system
US20090137237A1 (en) * 2005-09-26 2009-05-28 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Wireless communication system, base station device, mobile station device, and macrodiversity selection method
US8219042B2 (en) * 2005-09-26 2012-07-10 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Wireless communication system, base station device, mobile station device, and macrodiversity selection method
US20120314805A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2012-12-13 Hidekazu Tsuboi Wireless transmitting apparatus, wireless receiving apparatus, wireless communication system, wireless transmitting method and wireless receiving method
US20070099578A1 (en) * 2005-10-28 2007-05-03 Kathryn Adeney Pre-coded diversity forward channel transmission system for wireless communications systems supporting multiple MIMO transmission modes
US20070160162A1 (en) * 2005-10-31 2007-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and system for transmitting data in a communication system
US7729442B2 (en) * 2005-10-31 2010-06-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and system for transmitting data in a communication system
US8233552B2 (en) * 2005-11-07 2012-07-31 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for utilizing givens rotation expressions for asymmetric beamforming matrices in explicit feedback information
US8885465B2 (en) 2005-11-07 2014-11-11 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for utilizing tone grouping with givens rotations to reduce overhead associated with explicit feedback information
US20070104163A1 (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-10 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for utilizing tone grouping with givens rotations to reduce overhead associated with explicit feedback information
US7873016B2 (en) * 2005-11-07 2011-01-18 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for utilizing tone grouping with givens rotations to reduce overhead associated with explicit feedback information
US20070104288A1 (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-10 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for utilizing givens rotation expressions for asymmetric beamforming matrices in explicit feedback information
US20070155336A1 (en) * 2005-11-17 2007-07-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for eliminating multi-user interference
US7907912B2 (en) * 2005-11-17 2011-03-15 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for eliminating multi-user interference
US20070297529A1 (en) * 2005-11-17 2007-12-27 Shengli Zhou Recursive and trellis-based feedback reduction for MIMO-OFDM with rate-limited feedback
US7782573B2 (en) * 2005-11-17 2010-08-24 University Of Connecticut Trellis-based feedback reduction for multiple input multiple output orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (MIMO-OFDM) with rate-limited feedback
US20070135052A1 (en) * 2005-12-10 2007-06-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Downlink beamforming apparatus in OFDMA system and transmission apparatus including the same
US7646749B2 (en) * 2005-12-10 2010-01-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Downlink beamforming apparatus in OFDMA system and transmission apparatus including the same
US20070149236A1 (en) * 2005-12-27 2007-06-28 Naden James M Transmit power allocation in a distributed MIMO system
US7702353B2 (en) * 2005-12-27 2010-04-20 Nortel Networks Limited Transmit power allocation in a distributed MIMO system
US8005031B2 (en) * 2005-12-30 2011-08-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving a signal in a wireless communication system
US20070230383A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-10-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving a signal in a wireless communication system
US20090316807A1 (en) * 2006-01-13 2009-12-24 Sang Gook Kim Method and apparatus for achieving transmit diversity and spatial multiplexing using antenna selection based on feedback information
US20090298509A1 (en) * 2006-01-19 2009-12-03 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Radio transmission device and radio transmission method
US7760800B2 (en) * 2006-01-27 2010-07-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for estimating carrier-to-interference and noise ratio in a broadband wireless communication system
US20070201568A1 (en) * 2006-01-27 2007-08-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for estimating carrier-to-interference and noise ratio in a broadband wireless communication system
US8995916B2 (en) * 2006-02-02 2015-03-31 Fujitsu, Limited Wireless transmission method, and wireless transmitter and wireless receiver
US20080318606A1 (en) * 2006-02-02 2008-12-25 Fujitsu Limited Wireless transmission method, and wireless transmitter and wireless receiver
US8849212B2 (en) 2006-02-02 2014-09-30 Fujitsu Limited Wireless transmission method, and wireless transmitter and wireless receiver
US9294166B2 (en) 2006-02-02 2016-03-22 Fujitsu Limited Wireless transmission method, and wireless transmitter and wireless receiver
US8849211B2 (en) 2006-02-02 2014-09-30 Fujitsu Limited Wireless transmission method, and wireless transmitter and wireless receiver
US20070183521A1 (en) * 2006-02-09 2007-08-09 Himax Technologies Limited Method of channel estimation
US7929622B2 (en) * 2006-02-09 2011-04-19 Himax Technologies Limited Method of channel estimation
US7876851B2 (en) * 2006-03-06 2011-01-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for feeding back information on channel state for scheduling in multiple antenna system
US20070223619A1 (en) * 2006-03-06 2007-09-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for feeding back information on channel state for scheduling in multiple antenna system
US20070213013A1 (en) * 2006-03-08 2007-09-13 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for utilizing givens rotation to reduce feedback information overhead
US8180314B2 (en) * 2006-03-08 2012-05-15 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for utilizing givens rotation to reduce feedback information overhead
US20150036669A1 (en) * 2006-03-17 2015-02-05 Apple Inc. Closed-Loop MIMO Systems and Methods
US9755807B2 (en) 2006-03-20 2017-09-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink channel estimation using a signaling channel
US20070226287A1 (en) * 2006-03-24 2007-09-27 Lin Xintian E Mimo receiver and method for beamforming using cordic operations
US7649955B2 (en) * 2006-03-24 2010-01-19 Intel Corporation MIMO receiver and method for beamforming using CORDIC operations
US8014455B2 (en) * 2006-03-27 2011-09-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback of differentially encoded channel state information for multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) and subband scheduling in a wireless communication system
US8503555B2 (en) * 2006-03-27 2013-08-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback of differentially encoded channel state information for multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) and subband scheduling in a wireless communication system
US20110299626A1 (en) * 2006-03-27 2011-12-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback of channel state information for mimo and subband scheduling in a wireless communication system
US20070242770A1 (en) * 2006-03-27 2007-10-18 Byoung-Hoon Kim Feedback of channel state information for MIMO and subband scheduling in a wireless communication system
US8116407B2 (en) * 2006-04-06 2012-02-14 Mediatek Inc. Data recovery system and method thereof
US20100310020A1 (en) * 2006-04-06 2010-12-09 Chao-Ming Huang Data recovery system and method thereof
US7953176B2 (en) * 2006-04-06 2011-05-31 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting channel state information in multiple antenna system
US20090016463A1 (en) * 2006-04-06 2009-01-15 Dong Wook Roh Method for transmitting channel state information in multiple antenna system
USRE44093E1 (en) 2006-04-06 2013-03-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting channel state information in multiple antenna system
US7894505B2 (en) * 2006-04-19 2011-02-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting effective channel in a multi-user MIMO system
US20070253508A1 (en) * 2006-04-19 2007-11-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting effective channel in a multi-user MIMO system
US8699405B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-15 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US10608709B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2020-03-31 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US9900071B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2018-02-20 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8532569B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2013-09-10 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US7746943B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2010-06-29 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20130315331A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2013-11-28 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US9553638B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2017-01-24 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US20090207765A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2009-08-20 Tomoya Yamaura Wireless Communication System, Wireless Communication Apparatus, and Wireless Communication Method
EP2011250B1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2019-04-03 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US9331762B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2016-05-03 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
USRE45150E1 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-09-23 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US8699613B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-15 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8699477B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-15 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8699608B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-15 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8706028B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-22 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US9948366B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2018-04-17 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8705650B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-22 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8705651B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-04-22 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8774711B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2014-07-08 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8731096B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-05-20 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8730904B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-05-20 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US8768247B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-07-01 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8768246B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2014-07-01 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US9344222B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2016-05-17 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20110075606A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2011-03-31 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8744371B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2014-06-03 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20120269158A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2012-10-25 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US8260198B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2012-09-04 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US9825680B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2017-11-21 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US20170093477A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2017-03-30 Sony Corporation Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, and wireless communication method
US20070258541A1 (en) * 2006-04-27 2007-11-08 Tomoya Yamaura Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20100074309A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2010-03-25 Moon Il Lee Phase shift based precoding method and transceiver for supporting the same
US8036286B2 (en) 2006-05-26 2011-10-11 Lg Electronics, Inc. Signal generation using phase-shift based pre-coding
US20070274411A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2007-11-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Signal generation using phase-shift based pre-coding
US20070280373A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2007-12-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Phase shift based precoding method and transceiver for supporting the same
US20100074360A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2010-03-25 Moon-Il Lee Signal generation using phase-shift based pre-coding
US20090323863A1 (en) * 2006-05-26 2009-12-31 Moon-Il Lee Signal generation using phase-shift based pre-coding
US8284849B2 (en) 2006-05-26 2012-10-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Phase shift based precoding method and transceiver for supporting the same
US8331464B2 (en) 2006-05-26 2012-12-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Phase shift based precoding method and transceiver for supporting the same
US8000401B2 (en) 2006-05-26 2011-08-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Signal generation using phase-shift based pre-coding
US8160500B2 (en) * 2006-05-30 2012-04-17 Broadcom Corporation Method and apparatus to improve closed loop transmit diversity modes performance via interference suppression in a WCDMA network equipped with a RAKE receiver
US20100330925A1 (en) * 2006-05-30 2010-12-30 Severine Catreux-Erceg Method and Apparatus to Improve Closed Loop Transmit Diversity Modes Performance via Interference Suppression in a WCDMA Network Equipped with a Rake Receiver
US20110217936A1 (en) * 2006-05-30 2011-09-08 Severine Catreux-Erceg Method and Apparatus to Improve Closed Loop Transmit Diversity Modes Performance via Interference Suppression in a WCDMA Network Equipped with a RAKE Receiver
US8005432B2 (en) * 2006-05-30 2011-08-23 Broadcom Corporation Method and apparatus to improve closed loop transmit diversity modes performance via interference suppression in a WCDMA network equipped with a rake receiver
US8091006B2 (en) * 2006-06-02 2012-01-03 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Spherical lattice codes for lattice and lattice-reduction-aided decoders
US20070283210A1 (en) * 2006-06-02 2007-12-06 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Design of Spherical Lattice Codes for Lattice and Lattice-Reduction-Aided Decoders
US20080075196A1 (en) * 2006-06-14 2008-03-27 Samsung Electronic Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a closed-loop multi-antenna system
US8098746B2 (en) * 2006-06-14 2012-01-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a closed-loop multi-antenna system
US20080002601A1 (en) * 2006-06-30 2008-01-03 Coronel Pedro E Method and apparatus for relaying spatially-multiplexed signals
US20080013644A1 (en) * 2006-07-14 2008-01-17 Klaus Hugl Data processing method, data transmission method, data reception method, apparatus, codebook, computer program product, computer program distribution medium
US8396158B2 (en) * 2006-07-14 2013-03-12 Nokia Corporation Data processing method, data transmission method, data reception method, apparatus, codebook, computer program product, computer program distribution medium
US8098212B2 (en) * 2006-08-15 2012-01-17 Cisco Technology, Inc. Method for antenna array partitioning
US20080136735A1 (en) * 2006-08-15 2008-06-12 Navini Networks, Inc. Method for Antenna Array Partitioning
US20110268220A1 (en) * 2006-08-22 2011-11-03 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Restricted Codebooks And Related Signaling To Perform Beamforming
US20110194647A1 (en) * 2006-08-22 2011-08-11 Nec Laboratories America, Inc Method for Transmitting an Information Sequence
US10491285B2 (en) 2006-08-22 2019-11-26 Nec Corporation Method for transmitting an information sequence
US9941944B2 (en) 2006-08-22 2018-04-10 Nec Corporation Method for transmitting an information sequence
US8233560B2 (en) * 2006-08-22 2012-07-31 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Restricted codebooks and related signaling to perform beamforming
US8111679B2 (en) * 2006-08-23 2012-02-07 Fujitsu Limited Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US20080051150A1 (en) * 2006-08-23 2008-02-28 Fujitsu Limited Wireless communication apparatus and wireless communication method
US8542776B2 (en) 2006-08-31 2013-09-24 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a multi-antenna system, and system using the same
US20080056414A1 (en) * 2006-08-31 2008-03-06 Kim Sung-Jin Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a multi-antenna system, and system using the same
US8111782B2 (en) * 2006-08-31 2012-02-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving data in a multi-antenna system, and system using the same
US20080056402A1 (en) * 2006-09-06 2008-03-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting antenna in an orthogonalized spatial multiplexing system
US8155231B2 (en) * 2006-09-06 2012-04-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for selecting antenna in an orthogonalized spatial multiplexing system
US8315223B2 (en) * 2006-09-11 2012-11-20 Fujitsu Limited Mobile station, base station and radio communication method
US20090196272A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2009-08-06 Fujitsu Limited Mobile station, base station and radio communication method
US20110149857A1 (en) * 2006-09-19 2011-06-23 Moon Il Lee Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US20080089442A1 (en) * 2006-09-19 2008-04-17 Lg Electronics Inc. method of performing phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for supporting the same in a wireless communication system
US20110194650A1 (en) * 2006-09-19 2011-08-11 Moon Il Lee Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US20080205533A1 (en) * 2006-09-19 2008-08-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US8213530B2 (en) 2006-09-19 2012-07-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US7881395B2 (en) * 2006-09-19 2011-02-01 Lg Electronics, Inc. Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US7839944B2 (en) 2006-09-19 2010-11-23 Lg Electronics, Inc. Method of performing phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for supporting the same in a wireless communication system
US8135085B2 (en) 2006-09-19 2012-03-13 Lg Electroncis Inc. Method of transmitting using phase shift-based precoding and an apparatus for implementing the same in a wireless communication system
US20110222627A1 (en) * 2006-10-26 2011-09-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for codebook exchange in a multiple access wireless communication system
US7949069B2 (en) * 2006-10-26 2011-05-24 Magnolia Broadband Inc. Method, system and apparatus for applying hybrid ARQ to the control of transmit diversity
US20080123768A1 (en) * 2006-10-26 2008-05-29 Haim Harel Method, system and apparatus for applying hybrid ARQ to the control of transmit diversity
US9019845B2 (en) * 2006-10-26 2015-04-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for codebook exchange in a multiple access wireless communication system
US8391130B2 (en) * 2006-11-28 2013-03-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for estimating and reducing interference in wireless communication systems
US20080125048A1 (en) * 2006-11-28 2008-05-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for estimating and reducing interference in wireless communication systems
US7983366B2 (en) * 2006-12-05 2011-07-19 Intel Corporation Transmission signaling techniques to enhance receiver interference mitigation performance
US8229051B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2012-07-24 Intel Corporation Transmission signaling techniques to enhance receiver interference mitigation performance
US20080130506A1 (en) * 2006-12-05 2008-06-05 Shilpa Talwar Transmission signaling techniques to enhance receiver interference mitigation performance
US20080144737A1 (en) * 2006-12-19 2008-06-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Beamspace-time coding based on channel quality feedback
US8670504B2 (en) * 2006-12-19 2014-03-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Beamspace-time coding based on channel quality feedback
US8068445B2 (en) * 2007-01-08 2011-11-29 Cisco Technology, Inc. Scheduling uplink sounding signals
US20080165728A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-10 Navini Networks, Inc. Method and System for Scheduling Uplink Sounding Signals
US8472506B2 (en) 2007-01-09 2013-06-25 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for codebook design of MIMO pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US7983322B2 (en) * 2007-01-09 2011-07-19 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for codebook design of MIMO pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US20080165868A1 (en) * 2007-01-09 2008-07-10 Mark Kent Method and system for codebook design of mimo pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US7916620B2 (en) * 2007-02-02 2011-03-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-user data transmission/reception system and mode determination method
US20080187060A1 (en) * 2007-02-02 2008-08-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-user data transmission/reception system and mode determination method
US8515369B2 (en) * 2007-02-05 2013-08-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting transmission mode in multi-antenna system
US20080188192A1 (en) * 2007-02-05 2008-08-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for selecting transmission mode in multi-antenna system
US8873661B2 (en) * 2007-02-12 2014-10-28 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for an alternating channel delta quantizer for MIMO pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US20120106668A1 (en) * 2007-02-12 2012-05-03 Mark Kent Method and system for an alternating channel delta quantizer for mimo pre-coders with finite rate channel state information feedback
US8817899B2 (en) * 2007-02-12 2014-08-26 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for an alternating delta quantizer for limited feedback MIMO pre-coders
US20120076223A1 (en) * 2007-02-12 2012-03-29 Mark Kent Method and System for an Alternating Delta Quantizer for Limited Feedback MIMO Pre-Coders
US8284865B2 (en) 2007-02-14 2012-10-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20110110405A1 (en) * 2007-02-14 2011-05-12 Moon Il Lee Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20080198946A1 (en) * 2007-02-14 2008-08-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US7885349B2 (en) 2007-02-14 2011-02-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US7899132B2 (en) 2007-02-14 2011-03-01 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20100014608A1 (en) * 2007-02-14 2010-01-21 Moon Il Lee Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US8477863B2 (en) * 2007-02-16 2013-07-02 Interdigital Technology Corporation Precoded pilot transmission for multi-user and single user MIMO communications
US20080212702A1 (en) * 2007-02-16 2008-09-04 Interdigital Technology Corporation Precoded pilot transmission for multi-user and single user mimo communications
US20080219376A1 (en) * 2007-03-05 2008-09-11 Xiao-Feng Qi Methods and arrangements for communicating in a multiple input multiple output system
US8077796B2 (en) * 2007-03-05 2011-12-13 Intel Corporation Methods and arrangements for communicating in a multiple input multiple output system
US20080232501A1 (en) * 2007-03-20 2008-09-25 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Static and differential precoding codebook for mimo systems
US7839945B2 (en) * 2007-03-20 2010-11-23 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Static and differential precoding codebook for MIMO systems
US8755755B2 (en) * 2007-03-30 2014-06-17 Panasonic Corporation Radio communication system, radio communication apparatus, and radio communication method
US20100103044A1 (en) * 2007-03-30 2010-04-29 Panasonic Corporation Radio communication system, radio communication apparatus, and radio communication method
US8130864B1 (en) * 2007-04-03 2012-03-06 Marvell International Ltd. System and method of beamforming with reduced feedback
US8345795B1 (en) * 2007-04-03 2013-01-01 Marvell International Ltd. System and method of beamforming with reduced feedback
US20080248753A1 (en) * 2007-04-06 2008-10-09 Inha-Industry Partnership Institute Method and apparatus for retransmitting data based on antenna scheduling in MIMO system
US8068462B2 (en) * 2007-04-06 2011-11-29 Inha Industry Partnership Institute Method and apparatus for retransmitting data based on antenna scheduling in MIMO system
US20080253337A1 (en) * 2007-04-16 2008-10-16 Joonsuk Kim Method and system for sfbc/stbc transmission of orthogonally coded signals with angle feedback in a diversity transmission system
US7995457B2 (en) * 2007-04-16 2011-08-09 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for SFBC/STBC transmission of orthogonally coded signals with angle feedback in a diversity transmission system
US8135083B2 (en) * 2007-05-01 2012-03-13 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Codebook method for a multiple input multiple output wireless system
US20080273612A1 (en) * 2007-05-01 2008-11-06 Khojastepour Mohammad A Codebook Method for A Multiple Input Multiple Output Wireless System
US8467470B2 (en) * 2007-05-01 2013-06-18 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Codebook method for a multiple input multiple output wireless system
US20120275535A1 (en) * 2007-05-01 2012-11-01 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Codebook Method for a Multiple Input Multiple Output Wireless System
US20120250791A1 (en) * 2007-05-01 2012-10-04 Nec Laboratories America, Inc. Codebook Method for a Multiple Input Multiple Output Wireless System
US20150043552A1 (en) * 2007-05-02 2015-02-12 Tyco Fire & Security Gmbh Wireless communication system
US9893760B2 (en) 2007-05-02 2018-02-13 Tyco Fire & Security Gmbh Wireless communication system
US9455764B2 (en) * 2007-05-02 2016-09-27 Tyco Fire & Security Gmbh Wireless communication system
US20080273583A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-06 Kee-Bong Song Channel estimation for ofdm-based wireless communication system using sparsely spaced pilot subcarriers
US20080273452A1 (en) * 2007-05-04 2008-11-06 Farooq Khan Antenna mapping in a MIMO wireless communication system
US8130848B2 (en) * 2007-05-04 2012-03-06 Amicus Wireless Technology Ltd. Channel estimation for OFDM-based wireless communication system using sparsely spaced pilot subcarriers
US10142855B2 (en) * 2007-05-21 2018-11-27 Spatial Digital Systems, Inc. Channel bonding using K-muxing and multiple-beam antenna
US20120328036A1 (en) * 2007-05-21 2012-12-27 Spatial Digital Systems Method And Apparatus for Channel Bonding Using Multiple-Beam Antennas
US20170366982A1 (en) * 2007-05-21 2017-12-21 Spatial Digital Systems, Inc. Channel bonding using k-muxing and multiple-beam antenna
US9647347B2 (en) * 2007-05-21 2017-05-09 Spatial Digital Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for channel bonding using multiple-beam antennas
US20080299917A1 (en) * 2007-05-29 2008-12-04 Angeliki Alexiou Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US20130058383A1 (en) * 2007-05-29 2013-03-07 Lucent Technologies, Inc. Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US9020444B2 (en) * 2007-05-29 2015-04-28 Alcatel Lucent Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US7957701B2 (en) * 2007-05-29 2011-06-07 Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US20110211647A1 (en) * 2007-05-29 2011-09-01 Lucent Technologies, Inc. Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US8311489B2 (en) * 2007-05-29 2012-11-13 Alcatel Lucent Closed-loop multiple-input-multiple-output scheme for wireless communication based on hierarchical feedback
US7649831B2 (en) * 2007-05-30 2010-01-19 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-user MIMO feedback and transmission in a wireless communication system
US20080298482A1 (en) * 2007-05-30 2008-12-04 Rensburg Cornelius Van Multi-user MIMO feedback and transmission in a wireless communication system
US20080318520A1 (en) * 2007-06-01 2008-12-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmission and reception in multiple input multiple output system with replay station
KR101173940B1 (en) 2007-06-01 2012-09-03 보드 오브 리전츠, 더 유니버시티 오브 텍사스 시스템 Apparatus and method for transmission and recepetion in multi input multi output system with relay
US8050618B2 (en) * 2007-06-01 2011-11-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmission and reception in multiple input multiple output system with relay station
US20100195752A1 (en) * 2007-06-14 2010-08-05 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Transmitter/receiver for controlling multiuser multiple input multiple output system and method thereof
US8416876B2 (en) * 2007-06-14 2013-04-09 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Transmitter/receiver for controlling multiuser multiple input multiple output system and method thereof
US8452296B2 (en) * 2007-06-18 2013-05-28 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and apparatus to facilitate use of default transmitter-receiver configurations
US20080310353A1 (en) * 2007-06-18 2008-12-18 Motorola, Inc. Method and Apparatus to Facilitate Use of Default Transmitter-Receiver Configurations
US8582679B2 (en) * 2007-06-26 2013-11-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting of data and configuring a codebook in multi antenna system
US20110051834A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2011-03-03 Moon Il Lee Method of transmitting of data and configuring a codebook in multi antenna system
US9379796B2 (en) 2007-08-02 2016-06-28 Nec Corporation MIMO communication system having deterministic communication path and antenna arrangement method therfor
US8571125B2 (en) * 2007-08-02 2013-10-29 Nec Corporation MIMO communication system having deterministic channels and antenna arrangement method therfor
US20100135203A1 (en) * 2007-08-02 2010-06-03 Tsuguo Maru Mimo communication system having deterministic communication path and antenna arrangement method therfor
US20090042617A1 (en) * 2007-08-10 2009-02-12 Guangjie Li Beam selection in open loop mu-mimo
US8290539B2 (en) * 2007-08-10 2012-10-16 Intel Corporation Beam selection in open loop MU-MIMO
US20100166097A1 (en) * 2007-08-31 2010-07-01 Hua Zhou Wireless Communication System And Wireless Communication Method
US8699429B2 (en) * 2007-08-31 2014-04-15 Fujitsu Limited Wireless communication system and wireless communication method
US20100226417A1 (en) * 2007-09-19 2010-09-09 Bin Chul Ihm Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US7970074B2 (en) 2007-09-19 2011-06-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20100202500A1 (en) * 2007-09-19 2010-08-12 Bin Chul Ihm Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US7961808B2 (en) 2007-09-19 2011-06-14 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US8670500B2 (en) 2007-09-19 2014-03-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US8208576B2 (en) 2007-09-19 2012-06-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmitting and receiving method using phase shift based precoding and transceiver supporting the same
US20100226451A1 (en) * 2007-10-08 2010-09-09 Yun-Sang Park Apparatus and method for channel estimation in wireless communication system
US8750397B2 (en) * 2007-10-08 2014-06-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for channel estimation in wireless communication system
US10200096B2 (en) * 2007-10-15 2019-02-05 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Beamforming using predefined spatial mapping matrices
US8718155B2 (en) * 2007-10-26 2014-05-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Pilot design method, recording medium, and transmission apparatus
US20100254468A1 (en) * 2007-10-26 2010-10-07 Kim Ji Hyung Pilot design method, recording medium, and transmission apparatus
US20090117929A1 (en) * 2007-11-05 2009-05-07 Zhen Zhong Frankie Shuai Systems And Methods For Managing Access Channels
US8254996B2 (en) * 2007-11-05 2012-08-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Systems and methods for managing access channels
US8457008B2 (en) * 2007-12-26 2013-06-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting feedback information for performing collaborative MIMO
US20100309996A1 (en) * 2007-12-26 2010-12-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of Transmitting Feedback Information for Performing Collaborative Mimo
US20100266061A1 (en) * 2007-12-28 2010-10-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and device for pre-coding in multiple input multiple output system
US8451926B2 (en) * 2007-12-28 2013-05-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and device for pre-coding in multiple input multiple output system
US8249189B2 (en) * 2008-01-31 2012-08-21 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless transmission method and apparatus
US20100260288A1 (en) * 2008-01-31 2010-10-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless transmission method and apparatus
US8060811B2 (en) * 2008-03-12 2011-11-15 Redline Communications, Inc. Low complexity optimal soft MIMO receiver
US8799751B2 (en) * 2008-03-12 2014-08-05 Redline Communications Inc. Low complexity optimal soft MIMO receiver
US20090232241A1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2009-09-17 Redline Communications Inc. Low complexity optimal soft mimo receiver
US20120014483A1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2012-01-19 Redline Communications Inc. Low complexity optimal soft mimo receiver
US20090233557A1 (en) * 2008-03-14 2009-09-17 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless communications apparatus
US8442590B2 (en) * 2008-03-14 2013-05-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless communications apparatus
US20110026427A1 (en) * 2008-04-02 2011-02-03 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus in relaying system
US8526355B2 (en) * 2008-04-02 2013-09-03 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus in relaying system
US20090274226A1 (en) * 2008-05-05 2009-11-05 Motorola, Inc. Sounding channel based feedback in a wireless communication system
US20110105064A1 (en) * 2008-06-27 2011-05-05 Kyocera Corporation Radio communication device and radio communication method
US8559877B2 (en) * 2008-06-27 2013-10-15 Kyocera Corporation Radio communication device and radio communication method
US9106466B2 (en) * 2008-07-01 2015-08-11 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless communication apparatus
US20130064274A1 (en) * 2008-07-01 2013-03-14 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wireless communication apparatus
US8428538B2 (en) 2008-07-09 2013-04-23 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH Channel estimator
US20100009649A1 (en) * 2008-07-09 2010-01-14 Infineon Technologies Ag Channel estimator
US20100067512A1 (en) * 2008-09-17 2010-03-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Uplink transmit diversity schemes with 4 antenna ports
US20110211655A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2011-09-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for transmitting signals in multi-carrier radio transmission system
CN101729477A (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-06-09 三星电子株式会社 Method for transmitting signal in multiple carrier wireless transmission system
US8995574B2 (en) * 2008-10-31 2015-03-31 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for transmitting signals in multi-carrier radio transmission system
US20110255635A1 (en) * 2008-12-21 2011-10-20 Moon Il Lee Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
US8891651B2 (en) * 2008-12-21 2014-11-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
US9553645B2 (en) * 2008-12-21 2017-01-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
US20150063485A1 (en) * 2008-12-21 2015-03-05 Lg Electronics Inc. Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
US20100172430A1 (en) * 2009-01-05 2010-07-08 Ezer Melzer Precoding codebooks for mimo communication systems
US8391392B2 (en) * 2009-01-05 2013-03-05 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Precoding codebooks for MIMO communication systems
US8711970B2 (en) 2009-01-05 2014-04-29 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Precoding codebooks for MIMO communication systems
US8385441B2 (en) 2009-01-06 2013-02-26 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Efficient MIMO transmission schemes
US8670499B2 (en) 2009-01-06 2014-03-11 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Efficient MIMO transmission schemes
US20100172424A1 (en) * 2009-01-06 2010-07-08 Yona Perets Efficient mimo transmission schemes
US20110299623A1 (en) * 2009-02-16 2011-12-08 Zte Corporation Device and method for processing beamforming frequency
EP2388926A4 (en) * 2009-02-16 2016-09-14 Zte Corp Device and method for carrier frequency processing
US8780821B2 (en) * 2009-02-20 2014-07-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Channel interleaver for transmission of multiple code blocks in a wireless communication system
US20100215007A1 (en) * 2009-02-20 2010-08-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Channel interleaver for transmission of multiple code blocks in a wireless communication system
US20120014279A1 (en) * 2009-02-24 2012-01-19 Panasonic Corporation Wireless transmission apparatus and precoding method
US8737246B2 (en) * 2009-02-24 2014-05-27 Panasonic Corporation Wireless transmission apparatus and precoding method
US8699528B2 (en) 2009-02-27 2014-04-15 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Systems and methods for communication using dedicated reference signal (DRS)
US8699633B2 (en) 2009-02-27 2014-04-15 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Systems and methods for communication using dedicated reference signal (DRS)
US20110096704A1 (en) * 2009-02-27 2011-04-28 Adoram Erell Signaling of dedicated reference signal (drs) precoding granularity
US20120020434A1 (en) * 2009-03-16 2012-01-26 Rockstar Bidco Lp Transmission using common and dedicated pilots
US9344243B2 (en) * 2009-03-16 2016-05-17 Blackberry Limited Transmission using common and dedicated pilots
US20100254474A1 (en) * 2009-04-06 2010-10-07 Krishna Srikanth Gomadam Feedback Strategies for Multi-User MIMO Communication Systems
US8457236B2 (en) 2009-04-06 2013-06-04 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Feedback strategies for multi-user MIMO communication systems
US20100267341A1 (en) * 2009-04-21 2010-10-21 Itsik Bergel Multi-Point Opportunistic Beamforming with Selective Beam Attenuation
US8543063B2 (en) 2009-04-21 2013-09-24 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Multi-point opportunistic beamforming with selective beam attenuation
US9131453B2 (en) 2009-05-04 2015-09-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink power control for wireless communication
US9332508B2 (en) * 2009-05-04 2016-05-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink power control for wireless communication
US20140357310A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2014-12-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink power control for wireless communication
US20100297958A1 (en) * 2009-05-19 2010-11-25 Shinichi Murakami Transceiver
US8514335B2 (en) * 2009-05-19 2013-08-20 Hitachi, Ltd. Transceiver
US8306042B1 (en) * 2009-06-19 2012-11-06 Google Inc. Class-based deterministic packet routing
US20110007685A1 (en) * 2009-07-10 2011-01-13 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Downlink Channel Sounding in Wireless Communications Systems
US10498416B2 (en) 2009-07-10 2019-12-03 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for downlink channel sounding in wireless communications systems
US9184511B2 (en) * 2009-07-10 2015-11-10 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and method for downlink channel sounding in wireless communications systems
US10855353B2 (en) 2009-07-10 2020-12-01 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for downlink channel sounding in wireless communications systems
US9735852B2 (en) 2009-07-10 2017-08-15 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for downlink channel sounding in wireless communications systems
US11894897B2 (en) 2009-07-10 2024-02-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for downlink channel sounding in wireless communications systems
US20120134434A1 (en) * 2009-08-10 2012-05-31 Zte Corporation Method and system for precoding and method for constructing precoding codebook
US8483306B2 (en) * 2009-08-10 2013-07-09 Zte Corporation Method and system for precoding and method for constructing precoding codebook
KR101073296B1 (en) 2009-09-30 2011-10-12 인하대학교 산학협력단 Scheduling mehtod and the apparatus in multiuser mimo uplink
KR101608708B1 (en) * 2009-10-01 2016-04-04 삼성전자주식회사 Multiple-input multiple-output communication system using differential codebook including unitary matrices
US8675794B1 (en) 2009-10-13 2014-03-18 Marvell International Ltd. Efficient estimation of feedback for modulation and coding scheme (MCS) selection
US8917796B1 (en) 2009-10-19 2014-12-23 Marvell International Ltd. Transmission-mode-aware rate matching in MIMO signal generation
US8923455B2 (en) 2009-11-09 2014-12-30 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Asymmetrical feedback for coordinated transmission systems
US8325860B2 (en) 2009-11-09 2012-12-04 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Asymmetrical feedback for coordinated transmission systems
US20110110450A1 (en) * 2009-11-09 2011-05-12 Krishna Srikanth Gomadam Asymmetrical feedback for coordinated transmission systems
US20110150052A1 (en) * 2009-12-17 2011-06-23 Adoram Erell Mimo feedback schemes for cross-polarized antennas
US8761289B2 (en) 2009-12-17 2014-06-24 Marvell World Trade Ltd. MIMO feedback schemes for cross-polarized antennas
US9094251B2 (en) * 2010-02-10 2015-07-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiple input multiple output communication method and system for exchanging coordinated rank information for neighbor cell
US20110194632A1 (en) * 2010-02-10 2011-08-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiple input multiple output communication method and system exchanging coordinated rank information for neighbor cell
US8611448B2 (en) 2010-02-10 2013-12-17 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Codebook adaptation in MIMO communication systems using multilevel codebooks
US20110194638A1 (en) * 2010-02-10 2011-08-11 Adoram Erell Codebook adaptation in mimo communication systems using multilevel codebooks
US8761297B2 (en) 2010-02-10 2014-06-24 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Codebook adaptation in MIMO communication systems using multilevel codebooks
US8687741B1 (en) 2010-03-29 2014-04-01 Marvell International Ltd. Scoring hypotheses in LTE cell search
US9985708B2 (en) * 2010-05-04 2018-05-29 Celeno Communications Ltd. System and method for channel state related feedback in multi-user multiple-input-multiple-output systems
US20150124900A1 (en) * 2010-05-04 2015-05-07 Celeno Communications Ltd. System and method for channel state related feedback in multi-user multiple-input-multiple-output systems
US9401750B2 (en) * 2010-05-05 2016-07-26 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and precoder information feedback in multi-antenna wireless communication systems
TWI397276B (en) * 2010-06-03 2013-05-21 Univ Nat Chiao Tung System and method for wireless transmitting and receiving information
US20110299616A1 (en) * 2010-06-03 2011-12-08 National Chiao Tung University System and method of transmit diversity for wireless communications
US8306143B2 (en) * 2010-06-03 2012-11-06 National Chiao Tung University System and method of transmit diversity for wireless communications
US8743979B2 (en) * 2010-07-12 2014-06-03 Industrial Cooperation Foundation Chonbuk National University Method for precoding and decoding distributing MIMO channels in relay-based DF cooperative wireless networks
US20120008702A1 (en) * 2010-07-12 2012-01-12 Industrial Cooperation Foundation Chonbuk National University Method for precoding and decoding distributing mimo channels in relay-based df cooperative wireless networks
US20120014424A1 (en) * 2010-07-15 2012-01-19 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Communicating channel state information using predictive vector quantization
US8711961B2 (en) * 2010-07-15 2014-04-29 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Communicating channel state information using predictive vector quantization
US8885454B2 (en) * 2010-07-20 2014-11-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for precoding using channel orthogonalization in multi-user multi-antenna system
US20120020200A1 (en) * 2010-07-20 2012-01-26 Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. Apparatus and method for precoding using channel orthogonalization in multi-user multi-antenna system
CN101908950A (en) * 2010-08-16 2010-12-08 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for sending downlink and uplink control signals through multi-antenna system
US8446971B2 (en) * 2010-08-23 2013-05-21 Intel Corporation Communication station and method for efficiently providing channel feedback for MIMO communications
US20120045003A1 (en) * 2010-08-23 2012-02-23 Qinghua Li Communication station and method for efficiently providing channel feedback for mimo communications
KR101759644B1 (en) * 2010-09-08 2017-07-20 퀄컴 인코포레이티드 Sounding feedback schemes for very high throughput wireless systems
US9509391B2 (en) 2010-09-08 2016-11-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding feedback schemes for very high throughput wireless systems
US8615052B2 (en) 2010-10-06 2013-12-24 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Enhanced channel feedback for multi-user MIMO
US8750404B2 (en) 2010-10-06 2014-06-10 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Codebook subsampling for PUCCH feedback
US9640865B2 (en) * 2010-10-21 2017-05-02 Locata Corporation Pty Ltd Method and apparatus for forming a remote beam
US20130207842A1 (en) * 2010-10-21 2013-08-15 Locata Corporation Pty Ltd Method and Apparatus for Forming a Remote Beam
US10608337B2 (en) 2010-10-21 2020-03-31 Locata Corporation Pty Ltd Method and apparatus for forming a remote beam
US8798551B2 (en) * 2011-01-07 2014-08-05 Zte (Usa) Inc. Method and system for spatial CSI feedback for coordinated multi-point processing (CoMP)
US20120178374A1 (en) * 2011-01-07 2012-07-12 Zte Corporation METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPATIAL CSI FEEDBACK FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT PROCESSING (CoMP)
US9048970B1 (en) 2011-01-14 2015-06-02 Marvell International Ltd. Feedback for cooperative multipoint transmission systems
US20120190309A1 (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-07-26 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Assisted Open Loop Multiple Input, Multiple Output Communications
US8855577B2 (en) * 2011-01-21 2014-10-07 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and method for assisted open loop multiple input, multiple output communications
US8861391B1 (en) 2011-03-02 2014-10-14 Marvell International Ltd. Channel feedback for TDM scheduling in heterogeneous networks having multiple cell classes
US9124327B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2015-09-01 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Channel feedback for cooperative multipoint transmission
US20120276943A1 (en) * 2011-04-26 2012-11-01 Hitachi, Ltd. Wireless communication system, wireless communication method, and base station device
US8934938B2 (en) * 2011-04-26 2015-01-13 Hitachi, Ltd. Wireless communication system, wireless communication method, and base station device
US20170005711A1 (en) * 2011-08-11 2017-01-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for tracking beam in wireless communication system
US9088872B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2015-07-21 Intel Corporation Hybrid codebook design for wireless systems
US9020058B2 (en) 2011-11-07 2015-04-28 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Precoding feedback for cross-polarized antennas based on signal-component magnitude difference
US8923427B2 (en) 2011-11-07 2014-12-30 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Codebook sub-sampling for frequency-selective precoding feedback
US9031597B2 (en) 2011-11-10 2015-05-12 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Differential CQI encoding for cooperative multipoint feedback
US9137077B2 (en) * 2011-11-10 2015-09-15 Xiao-an Wang Heterogeneous pilots
US20130121379A1 (en) * 2011-11-10 2013-05-16 Xiao-an Wang Heterogeneous Pilots
US9220087B1 (en) 2011-12-08 2015-12-22 Marvell International Ltd. Dynamic point selection with combined PUCCH/PUSCH feedback
US8902842B1 (en) 2012-01-11 2014-12-02 Marvell International Ltd Control signaling and resource mapping for coordinated transmission
US9094164B2 (en) * 2012-04-17 2015-07-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus to improve channel estimation in communication systems
US20130272443A1 (en) * 2012-04-17 2013-10-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus to improve channel estimation in communication systems
US9143951B2 (en) 2012-04-27 2015-09-22 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Method and system for coordinated multipoint (CoMP) communication between base-stations and mobile communication terminals
US9813262B2 (en) 2012-12-03 2017-11-07 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for selectively transmitting data using spatial diversity
US10020963B2 (en) 2012-12-03 2018-07-10 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for selectively transmitting data using spatial diversity
US9591508B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2017-03-07 Google Technology Holdings LLC Methods and apparatus for transmitting data between different peer-to-peer communication groups
US9979531B2 (en) 2013-01-03 2018-05-22 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for tuning a communication device for multi band operation
WO2014116090A1 (en) 2013-01-28 2014-07-31 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmission/reception in radio communication system
US9603156B2 (en) 2013-01-28 2017-03-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for transmission/reception in radio communication system
EP2949053A4 (en) * 2013-01-28 2016-11-16 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Apparatus and method for transmission/reception in radio communication system
US9331883B1 (en) * 2013-03-05 2016-05-03 Quantenna Communications, Inc. Wireless home network supporting concurrent links to legacy devices
US10229697B2 (en) 2013-03-12 2019-03-12 Google Technology Holdings LLC Apparatus and method for beamforming to obtain voice and noise signals
US20140307814A1 (en) * 2013-04-15 2014-10-16 Broadcom Corporation Antenna Systems and Methods for massive MIMO Communication
US9407337B2 (en) * 2013-04-15 2016-08-02 Broadcom Corporation Antenna systems and methods for massive MIMO communication
US9853699B2 (en) 2013-04-15 2017-12-26 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Antenna systems and methods for massive MIMO communication
US9450720B2 (en) * 2013-06-13 2016-09-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for operating analog beam in a beam division multiple access system
US20140369328A1 (en) * 2013-06-13 2014-12-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for operating analog beam in a beam division multiple access system
US9386542B2 (en) 2013-09-19 2016-07-05 Google Technology Holdings, LLC Method and apparatus for estimating transmit power of a wireless device
US9516540B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2016-12-06 Netgear, Inc. Systems and methods for implementing a wireless device that supports WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US11621731B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2023-04-04 Netgear, Inc. Client wireless device that merges functions of upper and lower MAC layers to support WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US9948326B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2018-04-17 Netgear, Inc. Systems and methods for implementing a wireless device that supports WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US9439099B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2016-09-06 Netgear, Inc. Systems and methods for simultaneously using multiple WLAN modules operating in different wireless bands
US9923581B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2018-03-20 Netgear, Inc. Front-end module and antenna design for a wireless device simultaneously using WLAN modules operating in different wireless bands
US10911072B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2021-02-02 Netgear, Inc. Systems and methods for wireless load balancing and channel selection for a wireless device using WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US10819375B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2020-10-27 Netgear, Inc. Client wireless device that merges functions of upper MAC layer to support WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US9402199B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2016-07-26 Netgear, Inc. Systems and methods for wireless load balancing and channel selection for a wireless device using WLAN modules operating simultaneously in different wireless bands
US9549290B2 (en) 2013-12-19 2017-01-17 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for determining direction information for a wireless device
US10305557B2 (en) * 2013-12-20 2019-05-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Codebook for multiple-input multiple-output system and communication method and apparatus using same
US9136861B1 (en) * 2014-02-26 2015-09-15 Elta Systems Ltd. System and method for enhancing dynamic range of a beamforming multi-channel digital receiver
US9491007B2 (en) 2014-04-28 2016-11-08 Google Technology Holdings LLC Apparatus and method for antenna matching
US9478847B2 (en) 2014-06-02 2016-10-25 Google Technology Holdings LLC Antenna system and method of assembly for a wearable electronic device
KR102650862B1 (en) * 2015-10-19 2024-03-26 삼성전자 주식회사 How to transmit a signal, how to receive a signal, transmitter and receiver
WO2017069510A1 (en) * 2015-10-19 2017-04-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Signal transmitting method, signal receiving method, transmitter and receiver
KR20180057611A (en) * 2015-10-19 2018-05-30 삼성전자주식회사 Signal transmission method, signal reception method, transmitter and receiver
US9967122B2 (en) * 2016-01-19 2018-05-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for extending an OFDM waveform for multiplexing
US20170207941A1 (en) * 2016-01-19 2017-07-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for extending an ofdm waveform for multiplexing
CN107026681A (en) * 2016-02-01 2017-08-08 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Signaling method, method of reseptance, transmitter and receiver
US10236958B2 (en) * 2016-03-21 2019-03-19 University Of Science And Technology Of China Method for signal transmission to multiple user equipments utilizing reciprocity of wireless channel
US10771205B2 (en) * 2016-08-12 2020-09-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for performing communication by using non-orthogonal code multiple access scheme in wireless communication system
US20190181993A1 (en) * 2016-08-12 2019-06-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for performing communication by using non-orthogonal code multiple access scheme in wireless communication system
US10965435B2 (en) * 2016-11-16 2021-03-30 Huawei Technologies Duesseldorf Gmbh Techniques for pre- and decoding a multicarrier signal based on a mapping function with respect to inband and out-of-band subcarriers
US10284332B2 (en) * 2017-03-03 2019-05-07 Intel IP Corporation Spur cancelation using inverse spur injection
US11218197B2 (en) * 2017-10-05 2022-01-04 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Convex reduction of amplitudes for OFDM MIMO with multiple carriers
US20190239233A1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2019-08-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback-driven antenna array size adaptation
US11490395B2 (en) * 2018-01-29 2022-11-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Feedback-driven antenna array size adaptation
US10516452B1 (en) * 2018-06-08 2019-12-24 University Of South Florida Using artificial signals to maximize capacity and secrecy of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication
US10644771B2 (en) * 2018-06-08 2020-05-05 University Of South Florida Using artificial signals to maximize capacity and secrecy of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication
US10727911B2 (en) * 2018-08-20 2020-07-28 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Beamforming in MIMO radio networks
US20220393925A1 (en) 2018-10-26 2022-12-08 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Systems and methods for multi-carrier or multi-band low-papr precoding that handle cyclic prefix
US11811572B2 (en) 2018-10-26 2023-11-07 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Systems and methods for multi-carrier or multi-band low-PAPR precoding that handle cyclic prefix
US11588674B2 (en) 2018-10-26 2023-02-21 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Systems and methods for multi-carrier or multiband low-PAPR precoding that handle cyclic prefix
US11451283B2 (en) * 2020-05-21 2022-09-20 Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited Channel smoothing with TX beamforming
US11777585B2 (en) * 2021-09-03 2023-10-03 Nec Corporation Wireless receiving apparatus and method thereof
US20230216622A1 (en) * 2021-10-22 2023-07-06 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Precoding wireless communications
US11838225B2 (en) * 2021-10-22 2023-12-05 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Precoding wireless communications

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US9008013B2 (en) 2015-04-14
EP1766806B1 (en) 2017-11-01
US20160134339A1 (en) 2016-05-12
US11201648B2 (en) 2021-12-14
US20200162138A1 (en) 2020-05-21
US10554272B2 (en) 2020-02-04
WO2005125020A1 (en) 2005-12-29
EP1766789A4 (en) 2012-03-14
US10581500B2 (en) 2020-03-03
US11258489B2 (en) 2022-02-22
EP3313001A1 (en) 2018-04-25
US9628153B2 (en) 2017-04-18
HK1118650A1 (en) 2009-02-13
US20120106483A1 (en) 2012-05-03
EP1766789B1 (en) 2019-02-27
US9271221B2 (en) 2016-02-23
US20170222702A1 (en) 2017-08-03
EP3528575B1 (en) 2020-12-16
EP1766806A1 (en) 2007-03-28
US10263677B2 (en) 2019-04-16
US20080069031A1 (en) 2008-03-20
WO2005125044A1 (en) 2005-12-29
US8116262B2 (en) 2012-02-14
US20190229787A1 (en) 2019-07-25
US20200228175A1 (en) 2020-07-16
EP1766806A4 (en) 2013-01-02
EP1766789A1 (en) 2007-03-28
US20150215921A1 (en) 2015-07-30
EP3528575A1 (en) 2019-08-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11201648B2 (en) Closed loop MIMO systems and methods
US9887808B2 (en) Method and apparatus for implementing space frequency block coding in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing wireless communication system
US7949064B2 (en) Codebook and pre-coder selection for closed-loop mimo
US7813458B2 (en) System and method for precoding in a multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) system
KR100969753B1 (en) Apparatus and method for pre-coding in a wireless communication system using multi input multi output
KR101430888B1 (en) Communication station and method for efficiently providing channel feedback for mimo communications
US8989285B2 (en) Efficient MIMO precoding feedback scheme
US7773685B2 (en) Transmitting and receiving methods
EP2250848B1 (en) Progressive feedback for high resolution limited feedback wireless communication
US8638874B2 (en) Progressive feedback for high resolution limited feedback wireless communication
EP2328670B1 (en) System and method for wireless communications
KR100603765B1 (en) System and method for selecting antenna in mimo system
Mielczarek et al. Influence of CSI feedback errors on capacity of linear multi-user MIMO systems
KR200402027Y1 (en) Wireless transmit/receive unit and base station for implementing space frequency block coding for orthogonal frequency division multiplexing communications
KR20100097412A (en) Apparatus and method for transmitting data using precoding scheme in multiple antenna system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED, CANADA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:TONG, WEN;JIA, MING;MA, JIANGLEI;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:021386/0086;SIGNING DATES FROM 20050803 TO 20070212

Owner name: NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED, CANADA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:TONG, WEN;JIA, MING;MA, JIANGLEI;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20050803 TO 20070212;REEL/FRAME:021386/0086

AS Assignment

Owner name: NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED, CANADA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:TONG, WEN;JIA, MING;MA, JIANGLEI;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20050803 TO 20070212;REEL/FRAME:021955/0354

Owner name: NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED, CANADA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:TONG, WEN;JIA, MING;MA, JIANGLEI;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:021955/0354;SIGNING DATES FROM 20050803 TO 20070212

AS Assignment

Owner name: ROCKSTAR BIDCO, LP, NEW YORK

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:NORTEL NETWORKS LIMITED;REEL/FRAME:027143/0717

Effective date: 20110729

AS Assignment

Owner name: APPLE INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ROCKSTAR BIDCO, LP;REEL/FRAME:028606/0059

Effective date: 20120511

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 4

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 8